JP2019122593A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine which displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-101428, A

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the rendering effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
And title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect;
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the indication effects,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which suggestion effect is performed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or an advance notice effect) indicating that the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The suggestion effect executing means executes at least a first indication effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second indication effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the indication effect. Is possible,
The title notification means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be performed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggested effect is executed than when the second suggested effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect performing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode associated with a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B);
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit;
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (E, 8-11 (I ),)
During the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
As a suggested indication that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggested indication whose display size is the first size (shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. Display etc.) and a second suggestion display (the reach title image 31AK062 etc. of the second size displayed at the time of reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)) whose display size is the second size Further comprising means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control);
The display means is
Elements E1 (banana), Element E2 (melon), Element E3 (apple), Element E4 (watermelon), Element E5 (strawberry) as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). Etc.) can be displayed (the fruit pattern etc. shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a), (d)) can be displayed,
Even when any of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display is displayed in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), the display may be such that the elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062.
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of fluctuation pattern and reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a preliminary production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine in a state where a gaming machine frame is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. 51 is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the characteristic part 121IW. 51 is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing. It is an explanatory view showing a modification of a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows setting suggestion production determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a plurality of modes of setting suggestion effects. It is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestive presentation in variable display. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of setting suggestion effects in the big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestion log | history display in waiting for a customer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the overwrite update of a setting suggestion log | history display. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a plurality of setting suggestion history display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the overwrite update of several setting suggestion log | history display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestion log | history display for every category. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is an explanatory view showing an initial outcome determination table. It is a flow chart which shows prereading notice setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a pre-reading zone production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a super reach kind determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pre-reading zone production pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion production | presentation determination process in a game. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a during-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing under variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit inside production determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit inside suggestion production determination table, a character item production determination table, and a light-guide plate presentation determination table. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of pre-reading zone effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of pre-reading zone effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining a production mode of suggestion production during reach. It is an explanatory view for explaining a production mode of suggestion production during reach. It is a flowchart which shows small hitting end production processing (step S175). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a presentation stage determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing a production | presentation stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing a production | presentation stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit after suggestion production determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the priority of production control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount selector switch which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initialization setting control which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of alerting | reporting which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning a characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching processing at the time which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ongoing output change process which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of presentation control in the modification concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the initial operation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation in the modification which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation alerting | reporting screen which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the presentation control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning a characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation production control processing which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation production control process during setting change which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output aspect of a setting change corresponding | compatible signal. It is a timing chart which shows an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power activation. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the setting value is not a normal value, (2) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the setting value is a normal value, (3 ) It is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also referred to as special figures) as plural types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is being held, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. In the open state, of an elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period in which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an open upper limit period. A cycle in which the special winning opening is thus opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute repeatedly until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, "small hit" does not need to be as a display result of a special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability of the variable display under execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability of the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this Embodiment, and the kind of reach. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the change display mode of the decorative design does not become a reach mode, and the non-reach loser fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1 in which the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation display pattern of reach loss that the display result becomes "loss" because the mode of the variable display of the decorative design becomes a "reach" change patterns PA2-1-PA2-6, PA3-1-PA3-4, etc., the display result is a big hit The variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and so on, which become "," are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are performed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggested effect which suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown in the number of black stars in Fig. 8-1 (B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super Reach B <Super Reach A is in the order of high. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines becoming a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. In addition, during the production of the reach of the super reach, there may be a case in which the development presentation is performed to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that, in FIG. 8A, a variation pattern is shown in which the degree of reliability develops into a super reach one stage higher, but a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability develops by two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern may be provided in which the development effect is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest degree of reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E with the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach by display only, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and voice. As described above, notification of a title is performed by more rendering devices in the case of the highly reliable reach than in the case of the less reliable reach. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively heard, and the effect of presentation is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (such as gothic and Mincho type) and the typeface (such as a line and a calligraphy) may be made different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect contents of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the super reach according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the "left", "middle" and "right" of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral of "left" and "right" is stopped to be a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of becoming super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (D), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the introduction of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is ended, such as when the introductory portion of the super reach effect is ended, While the title 31AK002 (here, the letter "SP reach A") of Super Reach A is displayed on the entire screen, a voice (here, "Super Reach A") corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8 Thus, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The following part of the reach presentation of Super Reach A where is confronted is executed. The production in which the characters face each other is also referred to as battle production, and it becomes a big hit when the ally character wins in the battle production, and loses when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when displaying words on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the speech is not limited to displaying in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like as a subtitle.

(Super reach B)
In the case of becoming the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (F), the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B covers the entire screen of the image display device 5 when a predetermined period of time elapses after the Super Reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the Super Reach effect ends. (The letter "SP reach B" here) is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the title name of reach (here "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is It is informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The following part of the reach presentation of Super Reach B where is confronted is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. By doing this, since the title can be notified after showing the introduced part of the super reach effect to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the title notification.

  Also, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introductory part until a title is alert | reported, a super reach production | presentation is performed by a common production | presentation aspect (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is to be achieved after the start of the super reach effect, and which title is to be notified. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, it is not limited to completely sharing the presentation mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by watching the presentation, etc. The parts may be in a common presentation mode. For example, in the introductory part of super reach A and super reach B, super reach production (for example, production which displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a mode related to a title notified thereafter You may By doing this, the rendering effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the rendering. In this manner, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31 AK 007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) of Super Reach D is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, as the voice corresponding to the reach title name (here, “kill the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, the title of the super reach D is notified. As described above, in Super Reach D, a title is notified at the start of Super Reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree indication 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In addition, the alerting | reporting by the audio | voice of super reach D is not alert | reporting a title name as it is, but the content of reach is alert | reported. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is made different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification form of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31 AK 007 and the expectation degree indication 31 AK 008 continue to be displayed by being reduced in the upper right portion or the like of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can grasp the expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In addition, in FIG. 8-2 (I), although the same rendering content as FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) is shown, super reach production only for super reach D is performed. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is displayed. To be executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 (here, the letters "SP reach E") of Super Reach E is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, notification of a title by voice is not performed. Also, in conjunction with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is the enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other To be executed. As described above, in the Super Reach E, a title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low hit probability, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 8-2 (D), (F)). , (H)). By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the case of super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of the super reach with a high hit probability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach reach production with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title will be announced at the start. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach, which have low jackpot reliability, In E, the title was notified at the start of the Super Reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of Super Reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reach effect.

(Display area of title)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen of. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a large hit reliability, since title notification is performed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

  The method of varying the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be optionally changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit probability, title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low degree of reliability. Further, in the case where the display area to be notified of the title is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the place to be displayed may be made different.

(Expected degree indication indication)
In this embodiment, super reach A and super reach B with high hit reliability do not display anticipation indication in the title notification in super reach A and super reach D with lower hit reliability than super reach A and super reach B. In the title notification in, the expectation indication was displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effects from being disturbed. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E whose jackpot reliability is lower than Super Reach D, the expectation indication is not displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a low reliability reach. Note that the expectation indication may be displayed on at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) etc., the expectation indication is not limited to the one shown by the number of black stars, but may be made to indicate the expectation with a meter or a gauge, or the expectation may be The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, it is possible to increase the number of stages of expectation by enabling display of a half equivalent (half) of black stars. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach presentation is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In addition, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach presentation. Moreover, by performing as described above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed since it is possible to improve the rendering effect regardless of the display end timing.

  In addition, although it is abbreviate | omitted about the production | presentation operation | movement of the reach production of the super reach C here, the title alert | report according to big hit reliability and an expectation degree suggestion display should just be performed, for example.

(Decided production)
After each reach effect is performed, when it is time to derive the display result (end of the variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is “big hit” is performed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit", and a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the determined effect that the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), The finalized decorative design that will be a big hit combination is derived. In addition, if a display result is "loss", the image which shows that the ally character loses is displayed, and the finalized decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination is derived | led-out.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a clear title notification.

  In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative symbol is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. The way of displaying the decorative design during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying a character that is permanently displayed during hold display, active display, variable display or display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach. It may be At that time, during low-reliability reach effects such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively expected by the reach effect with low reliability, and to be able to pay attention to the reach effect in the highly reliable reach effect.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation when the development rendering is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is performed when the reach effect of the super reach D is being performed (the title notification of the super reach D is being performed), as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is performed such that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the case where the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  In addition, the development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but it may be an effect in which a crack is gradually broken on the screen, or a sandstorm (display as if it is broken) It may be displayed. With such an effect, unexpected effects can be performed. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gasse, such as an effect in which a reach is not developed, although a crack gradually enters the screen.

(Expected degree suggestive production)
In the stage operation example shown in Fig. 8-2 (H), a black star indicating the expected degree is displayed from the beginning that the expected degree indication 31AK008 indicates the expected degree, but five white stars are displayed first, and the stage is displayed. It may be made to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, expectation indication 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect is performed that fits within one of the white stars of the degree indication 31AK021. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black star is highlighted as if it is illuminated. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  In the example shown in Figure 8-5 (A)-(F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation degree indication has been increased by one step. One or more may be displayed to increase the expectation by two or more. In addition, half black stars may be displayed to increase the expectation by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Also, there may be a case where the voice is not output. By doing this, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation increasing at one time, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation increasing as it is displayed on the white star indicating the expectation degree indication. You may make it perform such an effect.

(Demonstration mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different rendering mode, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the rendering based on the command is executed in a different rendering mode. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound outputted from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  8-5 (G) to 8 (L) show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5A to 8F, title notification and expectation degree suggestion effects are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 different in the effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. Moreover, the expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a rhombus.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect is performed that fits within one of the white rhombuses of the degree indication 31AK024. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pong" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted as if it were illuminated. Thus, depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title, and the effect is achieved. improves.

  Although FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the rendering operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach rendering (title notification, degree of expectation) is performed according to the rendering mode (state when the reach rendering is performed) The presentation mode of the suggestion effect may be varied. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is to be notified or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing this, effects according to the player's preferences can be performed, and the effects of the effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree indication display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect of increasing the number of black stars in a stepwise manner is performed, but the expectation degree It is also possible to execute an expectation indication effect of decreasing the number of indications suggesting a. Such an expected degree suggestive effect may be performed in addition to or in place of the expected degree suggestive effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of developmental direction)
In the case of executing an expectation degree indication effect of increasing the display degree indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree indication display step by step, the development effect may be performed after the display indicating the expectation degree is increased. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed not in stages but at one time. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is informed and the effect of gradually increasing black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), an image is displayed. A development effect is performed in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the characters “SP reach C”) is displayed. , And the title of Super Reach C is informed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree indication 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, it is displayed at one time. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect may be performed in which the title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation change.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the notice effect, a title notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed according to a notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), while the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black and the audio corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), a title preview is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title preview is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title preview is executed. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, there may be a case where the display mode (display color) of the title changes after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed other than black from the start of display of the title.

  In addition, when a title advance notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, an audio according to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Further, the title notification by audio may be performed after the display mode (display color) of the title changes. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after change.

(Title execution timing)
It is preferable to execute notification of a title during reach at a timing other than the execution timing of a presentation (specific presentation) such as a preliminary presentation production or a development presentation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing this, when the title is notified once, an effect of improving the expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing an example of advance notice effect determination processing for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the advance notice effect and the effect mode. The preview control effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance presentation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (presence or absence of the execution of the preview of the title) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "loss", the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), for example. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from “Black”, “Red”, “Black” to “Red”, or “Black” to “Fruit” as shown in Fig. 8-9 (A). What changes, "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and in this order (ascending order), the big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the rendering effect is improved.

  In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be "fruit pattern" . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is performed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the one in which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the display period of the title is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine one of the changing timings. Then, in the case of a super reach (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in which the display period of the title is short, the number of changing timing may be one or less than the super reach in which the display period of the title is long.

  As the effect mode, when there are the normal mode and the special mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the preview of the title different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character's serif in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After the display color of the Super Reach title is determined, the display color of the character's speech (the presence or absence of the serif announcement) in the reach effect of the Super Reach is determined (Step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "loss", the display color of the speech in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C). As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display color of the speech in the reach production changes from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”. The big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the speech. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the speech, and the rendering effect is improved. It should be noted that, for those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the one in which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the presentation style of the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the same presentation mode (display color) is included in the title preview and the speech preview, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same presentation mode is obtained. Also, the big hit reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the change timing of the presentation mode with the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big hit reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the change timings of the title preview and the speech preview.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, in the special mode, the display color of the speech may be determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that in place of the speech notice, a notice effect may be executed to give notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided, and the big hit reliability may be different according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the speech in the reach effect or when it is determined not to be the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31 S001; No), the execution presence or effect mode is determined for other advance effects (step AK31 S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance presentation effect determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the super reach, it is possible to execute the title preview and the speech preview, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low reliability super reach), the title preview. And at least one of the serif announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title preview and the speech preview have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, for example, even if the decision ratio is made different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing this, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of effect modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title preview and the speech preview. By doing this, the effects are diversified and the effect is enhanced. In the title preview and the speech preview, the number of playable presentation modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of playable production modes may be the same. By doing this, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Effect production)
When the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes, a presentation may be performed that indicates that the presentation mode changes. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a speech may be performed. Then, after the effect presentation is performed, the presentation mode (display color) of the title or speech may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image and the like) of the action effect may be common to any of the title and words. Note that there may be cases where the presentation mode of the title or speech does not change despite the action presentation being performed. In the case of executing the effect presentation, the presence / absence of the execution of the operation presentation, the execution timing, and the presentation mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title preview and the speech preview. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31 S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the function presentation) may be different according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, The ratio (the ratio of acting on which effect mode) of the serif announcement and which presentation mode changes may be different, or the ratio of what color (in which stage) changes may be different. . By executing such an operation effect, the player becomes aware of which one of the title and the speech to act when the operation effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of effect effects and effect modes may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing this, it is possible to execute the action presentation according to the presentation mode, and the presentation effect is improved.

  As another example of such effect presentation, at least one of the presentation aspect (display color) of either the title or the speech according to the presentation content of the reach presentation (for example, the action of the character, the presentation content in the battle presentation, etc.) May change. By doing this, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic parts described in the above embodiment are not essential components, and can be appropriately omitted.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Although the term “sub-liquid crystal” is used here, the sub-display device may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub-liquid crystal, various effects such as display of preliminary effects and hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title notification, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title in the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand the title and the expectation indication which can display the title and the expectation indication without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a reach effect title as a suggested effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to title notification (information that mainly displays characters) regarding other effects. May be For example, in the case of executing pre-reading zone effect in which the background image in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) different as the pre-notice effect, for example, The present invention may be applied to the title notification of When presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate an enemy using a stick controller, etc.”), and execute a mission effect that will be in the player's favor when the mission is achieved. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 1 of Feature 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is performed, and then the display result is displayed ( Fig. 8-3 (B) to (D). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected in the operation valid period. The display result may be indicated by displaying the outcome of the battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing this, since the display result is indicated according to the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and the interest is improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the super reach in the modified example in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the character 31AK041, which is an ally character, and the character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), reach effects in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other are executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), the small button image 31AK043 and the restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thus, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that operation effects are to be executed are prepared. And big hit reliability differs according to which operation production image is displayed and operation production is performed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is performed during the reach effect may be changed to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 The image changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits on is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an operation effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the operation effect is performed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the control line 31AK 044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J) before the display result is derived, and as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the screen, prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. Thereafter, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. In addition, when operation is not detected within the operation effective period defined beforehand, the image shown to FIGS. 8-11 (L) will be displayed automatically.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image The jackpot confidence is high. Even when the operation effect image with a low degree of reliability is displayed, the operation effect image with a high degree of reliability may be changed during the reach effect, so the effect of presentation is improved, and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the rendering operation example shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11, the notification of the reach title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 It may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (presence or absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG.

(Modified Example 2 of Feature 31AK)
A suggestion display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. For example, the shutter effect that performs the first indication display and the reach title effect that performs the second indication display may be performed. In the shutter effect, after the start of variable display, an effect of covering the screen with shutter display is performed. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title preview of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined in another process.

  The specific image is an image of high hit reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In any of the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect execution, when the display is performed with the fruit pattern image, the big hit reliability is higher than the time when the display is not performed with the fruit pattern image. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including each of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit reliability when shutter production and reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification that the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The light emission control of the common sound and the game effect lamp 9 indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIGS. 8-12 are display screen diagrams when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display in the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrow indicates the variable display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, characters of "battle reach" indicating that reach effect with battle effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Tsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, it returns to the variable display screen by the original number symbol. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), all of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high hit probability has been displayed.

  Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  The determination (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) relating to the shutter effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 8-8. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31 AKS 002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily performed. Further, the determination of the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination of the shutter effect.

(Description of feature part 121IW)
Next, the feature part 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW 001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface It comprises a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, game balls as game media are fired from a predetermined ball striking device and are shot. In the gaming machine frame 121IW003, a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window is located between the door opening position where the front surface of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened centering on the left side and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a. When the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a salesclerk or the like at a game arcade in front of a lock (not shown) and unlocking the game machine, and players other than the clerk can use the gaming machine frame 121IW003 and glass The door frame 121IW003a can not be opened.

  The main substrate 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a substrate case 121 IW 201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, on the main board 11, there are a setting key 121IW 051 for switching to a setting change state or setting confirmation state to be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot probability (outfall rate) to be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 functioning as a setting switch and a clear switch 121IW050 for initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1 (performing an initialization process) are provided.

  A setting switching main body provided with an operation section operable by the player such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switching switch 121IW052 is accommodated in the substrate case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switching switch 121IW052 Is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back right side of the substrate case 121IW201 so as to be operable without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

  Since the board case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not complete when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. This operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk who holds the setting key can be operated. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature portion 121IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as being separate keys, but one key may be shared.

  Further, in the substrate case 121IW201, a display monitor 121IW029 and a display switching switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029 are disposed. The display monitor 121 IW 029 and the display switching switch 121 IW 030 are connected to the main substrate 11 and disposed at the upper left portion of the substrate case 121 IW 201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display switching switch 121IW030 are disposed on the front when the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 121IW201 is viewed. The main board 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 in the main feature portion 121IW can not be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside or the like of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature portion 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 121IW052 when closing the gaming machine frame 121IW003. A security cover 121IW500A is attached which covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 from the back side. The security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 And a transparent plate-like synthetic resin material. The upper and lower dimensions of the short piece 121IW500Aa are substantially the same as the upper and lower dimensions of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. The security cover 121IW 500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 121IW 001a via the front end of the short piece 121IW 500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 121IW201 from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side portion of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can not be operated by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 move along with the gaming machine frame 121IW003, and from the long piece 121IW500Ab By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 121IW 500Ab is released, so that the operation becomes possible.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 121IW, in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A restricts the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052. In the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the state is maintained, the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

  Since the substrate case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 or the setting change switch 121IW052 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The setting value can not be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting change switch 121IW052 unless the store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

  However, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the game arcade, for example, with the other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 Setting member 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or cell board from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming apparatus such as a card unit installed between Because there is a possibility that an illegal act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting change switch 121IW052 may be performed, the setting cover 121IW051 is switched to the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the switch 121IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Also, even in the restricted state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the back right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, the substrate is transparent through the security cover 121IW500A having transparency. Since the main substrate 11 and the like accommodated in the case 121 IW 201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which the electronic component such as the CPU 103 is mounted on the main substrate 11 and the condition of sealing and the like.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the main feature portion 121IW, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination, the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, and the common figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  In the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11 in the ROM 101, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), In addition to the display result judgment table (setting value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( 9-6, loss variation pattern determination table, common drawing display result determination table (not shown), common drawing variation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 121IW is configured to change the jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (out-rolling probability) of the big hit is changed . The set value is composed of three steps of 1 to 3. The payout rate is lowest when 1 is the lowest, and the payout rate becomes higher as the value becomes larger in the order of 1, 2 and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage is the lowest for the player, and the degree of advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3. In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the winning probability for the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of fluctuation indication, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variation display If it is determined that the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability variation, 1/32 at the probability variation). On the other hand, a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "2" or "3". It is supposed to Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even if the subject is subject to variable display, it will win the jackpot with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) Do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so the probability is higher (1/2) than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win a win.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display table for variation of a drawing corresponding to setting value 2 is used, the setting value is “1” when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Wins a big hit with a higher probability than in a certain case (1/300 at non definite variation, 1/30 at definite variation). On the other hand, a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "1" or "3". It is supposed to Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot wins the big hit with the same probability (1/300 at the non-probable change, 1/30 at the positive change) as in the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, which is a higher probability than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value It is supposed that the small hit will be won with the same probability (1/2) as in the case of “1” and “3”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, A big hit is won with a probability (1/280 at the time of non definite variation and 1/28 at the definite variation) higher than the case of "2". On the other hand, a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "1" or "2". It is supposed to Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even if the subject is subject to variable display, it will win the jackpot with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display (1/280 when not positive change, 1/28 when positive change). Do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, which is a higher probability than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value It is designed to win a small hit with the same probability (1/2) as when 1 is "1" or "2".

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C). If it agrees with the hit judgment value, it decides to make it a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) regarding the special symbol. Further, if MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, although the case of the small winning probability being the same is shown regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the smaller the winning probability may be set to increase as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2 and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be made to be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit in the setting value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit in the setting value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, The probability of winning a small hit at the setting value “3” may be set to 1 / 87.5.

  In addition, in the gaming machine in which the small hit is not provided, the configuration shown by the main feature part 121IW may be applied.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol regardless of the fluctuation special view designation buffer and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The common table may be used for the determination, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the first and second variation special-characteristic designation buffers.

  In addition, although the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown in the present characteristic portion 121IW, for example, the order of the priority according to the gaming state May be configured to change. For example, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine which is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintained at a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and obtained a prize ball having a small hit game. In this case, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and a period in which a prize ball is easily obtained In the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), unlike the other gaming states, it is difficult to generate a big hit (high probability / high base state tends to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest degree of advantage.

  In addition, for example, after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state), the same probability change when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display of the predetermined number of times (number of probability change terminations). If it is the number of terminations, the probability change continuation rate (the continuous rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, although a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and pachinko gaming machines The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit classification judgment table)
FIG. 9-5 (A) is an explanatory view showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In the main feature portion 121IW, the case of determining the jackpot type using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), In the case of determining the jackpot type using the suspension storage based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed), the common jackpot type determination table Although configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of determining which jackpot type is different.

  The big hit type determination table is a type of big hit from big hit type A to big hit type C based on a random number for big hit type determination (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is made a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine which one.

  In the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the big hit type determination random number (MR2) is assigned to each set value, but for simplification of the description, The ratio of the judged value is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined is shown for each setting value. In addition, determination values corresponding to random numbers are actually assigned to the lost fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 described later, the non-reach lost fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, etc. In order to simplify the above, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, When the percentage determined to be the big hit type B is high and the setting value is “3”, the determination value is assigned such that the percentage determined to the big hit type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the main feature part 121IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5B. In the main feature part 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period in the big hit game are respectively defined for each big hit type. It is done.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening process of step S114 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state It is a period during which fanfare effect is performed as the effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the round of opening the big winning opening on the effect control substrate 12 side is completed, It is a period during which the interval effect as the effect operation to notify the start of the round of is performed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and on the effect control board 12 side, ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state. Period.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period become the longest in the case of the big hit type A, then become longer in the case of the big hit type B, and the most in the case of the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

  As described above, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the percentage determined to be the big hit type C is high, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage determined to be the jackpot type A is high, and the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature part 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit becomes higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value “1” In the order of “<2” <“3”, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is also configured to be longer. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit is set high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period, that is, to delay the progression of the game, Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  In this feature part 121 IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit inside suggestion effect (details will be described later) suggesting the setting value, but this big hit inside suggestion effect during fanfare period, interval period and ending It is feasible in the period. Such a configuration can enhance the interest of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period by directing the player's attention to the jackpot suggestion effect.

  In addition, in the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be performed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that effects (for example, display of a still image, etc.) which are difficult for the player to notice the length of the period are executed in common.

  In the feature portion 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the configuration is such that the ratio of determining which jackpot type is determined for each setting value is different. When the winning probability (out-rolling rate) is set to a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the proportion of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period, in which relatively long periods are set in the order of jackpot type A <B <C, is high. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of “1” <“2” <“3” in the setting value.

  In this feature portion 121IW, in any case of big hit type A to big hit type C, time saving control and probability variation control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (100 times for the present feature portion 121IW). The game is ended by the game being played or the big hit game state being made before the predetermined number of special game is played, but for example, the number of times of the time saving control and the probability variation control is made different for each big hit type In the case of a specific big hit type, high probability control and time saving control which are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are continuously executed until a big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without passing through the normal state, ie, a so-called continuous state. In this feature portion 121 IW, the percentage of big hit differs for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each setting value The rates may be different.

  Also, in the main feature part 121IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, presence or absence of time reduction control and probability change control, number of controls, etc.) in big hit type A to big hit type C, fanfare period, interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability change control, the number of control times are different for each big hit type, and the degree of advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effects in the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, according to the set value, the big hit type when the variation display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set values that are set, among the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C, the big hit type that can not be determined is one or There may be more than one. That is, depending on the set value being set, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may differ by not determining any one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%) or 100% of the specific jackpot types. It is included to determine in proportions.

  In addition, although the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different according to the big hit type is shown in the present characteristic portion 121IW, the fan fare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to such modes. The periods may be configured to be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the setting value may be uniformly determined according to which of the setting values “1” to “3”. In addition, for example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, the lottery process with the selection probability according to the set value is performed to determine the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. You may

  As described above, in the main feature portion 121IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variation display result is the jackpot differs according to the set value set, it is possible to improve the game interest. .

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is the result of displaying the special figure You may determine using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

  Further, in the main feature portion 121IW, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, while the big hit probability changes in accordance with the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself is not changed, but the present invention is limited thereto. The game property may be changed according to the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 instead.

  For example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the gaming property (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal status is 1/320 and the probability status is 65% If the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during a big hit in the normal state with 1/200 of the big hit probability in the normal state While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a definite change state based on passing the predetermined count switch, the game where the game ball passes the count switch in the big hit game according to the big hit type differs If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. Also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) which is controlled to the big hit game state on the basis of passing the specified count switch which is provided inside special variable winning a prize ball device 7 (during time saving control) Good. Furthermore, although the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3 in the game property, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than the case where the setting values are any of 1 to 3 A setting in which the number of award balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the case where the game property is changed in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the case of the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is a switch for effect (a game ball passes the count switch) Use as a switch to perform a predetermined effect each time you set, if the setting value is 2 or 3, the game switch (game ball is a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probability change state or a big hit gaming state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit classification judgment table)
9-5 (C) is an explanatory view showing a small hitting type judgment table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), in the present characterizing portion 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as the small hit types. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), in the present characterizing portion 121IW, the determination ratio of the small hitting types A to C is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  Further, in the feature portion 121IW, regardless of which of the small hitting classifications A to C, the opening period and opening number of the big winning opening in the small hitting game are the same, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the "small hit" variation display result A small hit variation pattern determination table to be used when is pre-determined, and a loss variation pattern determination table to be used when it is pre-decided to set the variation display result to "lost" is prepared in advance. .

(Loss change pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory view of a loss change pattern determination table. In the feature portion 121IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) until the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) from the time when the setting change is performed at power on. Hereinafter, different loss variation pattern determination tables are used in different periods of time).

  Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9A, and in the non-special period, it is illustrated in FIG. The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, a period from the time when the setting change is performed at the time of power on to the time when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. For example, regardless of whether or not the setting change is performed when the power is turned on, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period. Also, using a real time clock or the like, a special period may be used if it is a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Also, a period until the first big hit occurs may be set as a special period.

  The first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A and 9B are normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Judgment values are assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach lost is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs according to the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach and the super reach are performed.

  The first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) has a higher ratio of the normal reach loss due to the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and the set value Judgment values are assigned such that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach is more easily recognized than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easy to recognize the suggestion of the set value). Can increase the fun of the game.

  Note that, for example, a variation pattern with super reach (or a particular variation pattern thereof) is determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may By doing this, depending on the set value, only the specific variation pattern (in this example, normal reach loss) the execution rate will be different, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, according to the set value, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern which causes the super reach loss may also be changed.

  The first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned such that the proportion of (i.e., the normal reach loss: the balance of super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss becomes extremely high in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” (this example) In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), the normal reach loss is set in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Is set to be slightly higher (in this example, 0.2% higher). With such a configuration, the setting value is suggested by the selection tendency of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Moreover, the difference in selection tendency can be increased between the special period and the non-special period.

  In the feature portion 121IW, although the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, this means that the execution rates of the entire normal reach loss and the super reach loss differ according to the set value, and according to the set value This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss differs depending on the set value.

  In the feature portion 121IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A and 9B is used. To display the variation of the decoration pattern. Further, even when the setting value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image, and performs variation display of the decorative pattern. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game from the special period or the time the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  The present invention is not limited to the example of the characteristic portion 121IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a setting value (e.g., a variation pattern having a pattern of variation display of a decorative pattern different from a normal pattern and the setting value 1 or 2). And the special variation pattern may be selected only in a special period. With such a configuration, it is also possible to give motivation to play a game in a special period, and to enhance game fun.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory view of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature portion 121IW, a plurality of non-reach loss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss, it is determined which one of the non-reach losses A to C. Is configured. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, non-reach losses A to C are included in the lost fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6, and any of non-reach losses A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss It may be configured to make decisions.

  As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2 If the ratio is determined to be non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and the setting value is “3”, the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high The judgment value is assigned to.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the proportion of being determined as non-reach loss C is high, so the fluctuation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the proportion of being judged as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature part 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit becomes higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value “1” In the order of “<2” <“3”, the average fluctuation time is also increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the average fluctuation time, that is, to delay the progression of the game when the jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) for the big hit is set to be high, that is, the euphoria becomes too high. It can be prevented.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of which one of the non-reach loses A to C the fluctuation time is different depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time may be different, and the selection ratio may be different according to the set value. When a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of swing display or high-speed variation display of the decorative pattern is made different, etc. It is desirable to make sure that there is no difference in appearance.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the finalized decorative symbol (final The period in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of big hit (dispense rate) is set high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the finalized symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

  In the feature portion 121IW, the fluctuation time is set to each of the non-reach losses A to C, and the ratio of the non-reach losses A to C to be determined is different for each set value, thereby winning the big hit. When the probability (outgoing ball rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, but fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern for each set value Is fixedly set, and the setting may be such that the variation time is longer if the jackpot probability (out-rolled ball rate) is set high.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, a variation pattern for shortening is provided in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a fluctuation pattern of shortening non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of pending storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3). In such a configuration, when the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and the variable display is performed efficiently (that is, the game is efficiently advanced) ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of held memories is equal to or more than the predetermined number. Therefore, in the present characterizing portion 121IW, the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of pending storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number has a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting value. In addition, regardless of the configuration of the feature portion 121IW, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the set value also for the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of pending storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 121IW will be described. 9-8 and 9-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the feature portion 121IW. In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the processes of steps IWS001 to S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When initialization is performed, the CPU 103 waits for effect control means activation to measure the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when power supply to the game machine is started. The timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, in the effect control means activation waiting timer, a sufficient time is set from when power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer (step 121IWS004), and checks whether the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer after subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the process of step 121IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 003 to S 005, after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to be activated, the processing of step 121 I WS 006 and subsequent steps is executed to execute change and confirmation of setting values, initialization of RAM, recovery processing, etc. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command which will be described later are transmitted before the CPU 120 for effect control starts up. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets, for example, the factory default setting flag indicating that the setting at the time of factory shipment is left in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). To be cleared, and to be cleared when the setting change processing described later is executed), and to confirm whether or not this factory default setting flag is set in step 121IWS006. do it. In addition, for example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that it is the factory default is set as the setting value, and the value of the setting value is set in step 121IWS006. It may be checked whether or not it is the factory default value. If it is the setting at the time of factory shipment (step 121 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 121 IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 121 IWS 007). Specifically, in step 121IWS 007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121 IWS 007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs data check of the backed up data by the same process as step S5 (performed using an error detection code), and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not it is (step 121IWS008). Step 121 IWS 008 determines whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process moves to step IWS010.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether a setting change in progress flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting change in progress flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed due to power interruption or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  At step 121 IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormal error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121 IWS010). The CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, a display of “E”) indicating that the error is a RAM error in the display monitor 121IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch 121IW 050 is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 121IWS 014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, an area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuity ratio, duty ratio, and base among the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and performance display such as continuity ratio, commission ratio, and base Information is not cleared and kept. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is off (N at step 121IWS011) or when the setting key 121IW051 is off (N at step 121IWS012), the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is off. At (N of step 121 IWS013), the process does not shift to step 121 IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

  When the process of step 121 IWS006 to S014 is executed, the backup RAM is not normal in this feature portion 121 IW (N in step 121 IWS 007, S 008), or remains in the factory default setting (step 121 IWS 006 Y: If power interruption occurs while changing settings (Y in step 121 IWS 009), the setting key 121 IW 051 is turned on and the clear switch 121 I W 050 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121 IW 003 opened. The RAM is cleared on the condition that it has been done, and it becomes possible to change the set value after step 121IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch 121IW050 are not turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values can not be changed, and gaming control does not proceed.

  If the setting change in progress flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch 121IW 050 is on (step 121IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is to be started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

  On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation process start command is received, control to notify that the setting is being confirmed is performed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R) Output a sound of the light, or emit a decorative light such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B is pressed on the effect control board 12 side, it may be displayed as "maintenance mode" or the like to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, setting the date and time of the real-time clock, the history of occurrence of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed or after the change) In this mode, it is possible to confirm the setting value recording When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed, the maintenance mode is also ended.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply by the same process as step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process is ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS016) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, recovery processing (step 121IWS022) is performed to restore the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command for instructing recovery from power failure by the same processing as step S 7 (step 121 IWS 023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch 121IW 050 is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, an area for storing performance display information such as a ratio, a duty ratio, and a base among the storage areas of the RAM 102 and an area other than an area for storing a set value are cleared. The information for performance display such as the duty ratio and the base, and the information of the setting value are not cleared but are held.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting change flag (step 121IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating that the setting change process is to be started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control to notify that the setting is being changed is performed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R) Output a sound of the light, or emit a decorative light such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (step 121IWS029).

  When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change in progress flag (step 121IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the set value which has been set to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS 031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS 032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, the effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the processes of steps IWS034 to S036 are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 9-10 (A) is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing (step 121IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of step 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 121IWSA04). Then, it shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that a setting confirmation error has occurred, and the setting control error notification is executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED of a substrate mounted on a game machine. Further, in the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, by shifting to the loop processing, thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the processing is not advanced.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not turned on, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process.

  Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. 9-10 (B) is a flowchart showing setting change processing (step 121IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting change switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting change switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029. If the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "3" and the display monitor 121IW029 displays "3" as the set value, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated and displayed to "1". In addition, the CPU 103 stores the setting value (setting value after update) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the setting value already stored) (step 121IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the process of step 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 121IWSB07). Then, it shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that it is a setting change error, and the setting control error notification is executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED of a substrate mounted on a game machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, by shifting to the loop processing, thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the processing is not advanced. In this case, since the flag under change in setting remains set at step 121IWS027, after the power is turned on again, the RAM clear 1 process is executed (Y at step 121IWS009, see 121IWS014), The error condition will be cleared.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not turned on, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing.

  FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory view of the process performed when the power is turned on. In the feature portion 121IW, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on at the time of power on (when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch 121IW050 is turned on. If it is on, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch 121IW050 is off, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121 IW 051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S 8) is executed if the clear switch 121 IW 050 is on, and the recovery process (step S 6) if the clear switch 121 IW 050 is off. ) Is executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a salesclerk of the game arcade or the like, the power for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during the big hit game or the small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning hole is closed by stopping the supply of the power to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), when the store clerk or the like at the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch 121IW050 (if Yes at step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 121IW051 is displayed. The setting change processing is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is ON, and the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (D), in the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 121IW052 by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.3.fwdarw.1... Whenever the setting switch 121IW052 is operated). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121 IW 029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the CPU 103 ends the display on the display monitor 121IW029 based on the setting key 121IW051 being turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game arcade. The store clerk or the like of the game arcade is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Also, when the pending storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the pending storage is cleared. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing shown in FIG. 9-12 (at the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Because the memory about the big hit is erased, the big winning opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the display on the display monitor 121 IW 029 (in a manner showing that the game is in progress as in the case of FIG. The game can be performed, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the determination lottery of the change pattern, the payout of the winning balls, and the like can be performed.

  In the setting change process in the characteristic portion 121IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process is not the one that is most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the main feature portion 121IW), or the most advantageous for the player A set value (“3” in the case of the main feature portion 121 IW) may be displayed.

  Further, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process is not limited to the display mode shown in FIG. 9-12, and may be the display mode shown in FIG. 9-13. 9-13 (A)-(D) are similar to FIGS. 9-12 (A)-(D), and as shown in FIG. 9-13 (E), the CPU 103 uses the setting key 121IW051 as a game arcade. The display monitor 121IW 029 is displayed in a flickering manner on the basis of the fact that it has been turned OFF by the operation of the store clerk or the like, thereby notifying the store clerk or the like of the game arcade that a new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and the game can be performed, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, the determination lottery of the variation pattern, the payout of the winning balls, and the like can be performed.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, a case is shown in which the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. However, not limited to such an aspect, for example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the setting value is "1", four digits of "-S-1" are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, or if the setting value is "2", "-S-2" on the display monitor 121IW029. The four digits of “−S−3” may be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 if the set value is “3”. Further, for example, the setting values may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", display of four digits of "1111" is performed on the display monitor 121IW029, and if the setting value of "2", display of four digits of "2222" is performed on the display monitor 121IW029. May be

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, processing of special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the present characterizing portion 121IW will be described. 9-14 and 9-15 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 121 IWS 101). For example, the count value of the combined pending storage number counter for counting the combined pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 121 IWS 102). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second number of pending storages is not 0, CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step 121 IWS103). If the second pending storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 121 IWS 104).

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 102 to S 104, in the present characterizing portion 121 IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, not only such a mode, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol in accordance with the starting winning order in which the game balls have won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121 IWS 105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 determines each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second holding storage number = 1 in the second holding storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the pending storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total storage reserve number counter is decremented by 1 (step 121 IWS 107). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS 108). In the feature portion 121IW, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of power on by performing the process of step 121IWS 031. However, even after the power on, the step is performed. The setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by execution of the processing of the IWS 121.

  If the same variation pattern is used to transmit different variation pattern commands for each setting value, the variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns × the number of setting values (3 in this example) are required. And the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only variation pattern commands corresponding to a particular variation pattern may be provided with variation pattern commands for the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation are fluctuation pattern commands for the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Furthermore, in this example, the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 121 IWS 031) transmitted at power on and the setting value command (see step 121 IWS 108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation. It is not limited to the For example, even if the setting value command for power-on and the setting value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands are transmitted at power-on and fluctuation start. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case is shown where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation, but it is configured to transmit the rendering control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. It is also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted if the setting value is “1”, and if the setting value is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the setting value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  The game control microcomputer 100 can output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the setting value, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is made different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high ratio, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. If the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured to have the same fluctuation time, but differ in the presence or absence of pseudo run, the number of times of pseudo run, the presence or absence of reach, and the type. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command can not be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or the selection ratio for exclusive use when the setting value command can not be received normally. The variation pattern may be selected by

  Further, in the present example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted at the start of the change is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 121 IWS 109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the definite variation state background designation command when it is in the definite variation state, and performs control to transmit the short time status background designation command when it is the short time condition, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number value MR1 for special image display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big hit determination module compares the predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 9-4) with the random number value MR1, and determines processing to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit judgment values (N in step 121 IWS 110), the CPU 103 performs small hit judgment processing (step 121 IWS 111). Then, if it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 121 IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating small hit (step 121IWS112), and shifts to step 121IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 121 IWS 111), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step 121 IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the big hit determination values (Y in step 121 IWS 110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS 113). Next, using the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9-5), the CPU 103 uses the type corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A "," Big hit type B "or" big hit type C ") is determined as the type of big hit (step 121 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined type of big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121 IWS 115). For example, if the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and if the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which becomes an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Also, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a special symbol which changes according to big hit classification. Also, for example, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS 117).

  Next, the effects according to the first embodiment and the effects according to the second embodiment will be described as effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting the setting values as described in the characteristic portion 121IW. . In the following, the feature portion of the effect according to the first embodiment is referred to as the feature portion 1560S, and the feature portion of the effect according to the second embodiment is the feature of the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting the setting values described above Like the part, the feature part 121IW is used.

(Description of effects relating to the feature portion 1560S)
First, an effect (effect according to the feature portion 1560S) according to the first embodiment executed in a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 capable of setting a setting value as described in the feature portion 121IW will be described. In the following description of the characteristic portion 1560S, the state in which the predetermined effect is "continuing" is not only the state in which the predetermined effect is continuously executed, but also a storage unit that stores information related to the predetermined effect ( For example, in the RAM 122), a state in which a predetermined effect (or an effect based on information related to a predetermined effect) can be executed (a state in which it can be continuously executed), or a predetermined It also includes a state in which the execution of other effects that can be performed is prohibited at the timing of executing the effects (a state in which only a predetermined effect is permitted to be performed). More specifically, in a state where the predetermined effect is "continuation", a state (for example, a state in which a predetermined effect (for example, a setting suggestion history display described later) is continuously displayed on the effect display device 5). A state in which display is continued for a predetermined period), a state in which display can be performed again even if the display is once canceled (for example, a state in which display is possible by a predetermined operation) By displaying a predetermined setting suggestion effect to be displayed, a state in which the display of another effect (other setting suggestion effect) is prohibited is included.

(Description about the setting suggestion effect)
First, the setting suggestion effect which is one of the effects relating to the characteristic portion 1560S will be described. The setting suggestion effects in the present embodiment are effects that suggest setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that since the element for determining the setting value is one of the pleasures for the player, by executing this setting suggestive effect at an appropriate timing, an expected feeling of being able to determine the setting value can not be easily determined. In the long run, it will be possible to enjoy the game.

(Setting indication production decision processing)
First, as an operation of the effect control means in the main feature portion 1560S, a setting suggestion effect determination process is described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing setting suggestion effect determination processing which is a part of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 1560S. In the main feature portion 1560S, in the variable display start setting process (S171) and the big hit medium effect process (S177) in the effect control main process (specifically, the effect control process process), the execution of the setting suggestion effect and its contents A setting suggestion effect determination process for determining is performed.

  In the setting suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, when the ending effect is started in the jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the variable display start setting process, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the cumulative number of variable displays performed without the big hit game being performed, or after the big hit game is over The cumulative number of variable display (hereinafter referred to as “number of fit”) performed without the next big hit game reached a predetermined number (for example, the reciprocal of the jackpot probability to about twice the reciprocal; for example, 500) Also, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step 1560 SS 01).

  If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting suggestion effect determination table (step S1560SS02), and it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. If not, the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting indication effect determination process. In this embodiment, a plurality of modes (A-1 to A-2, B-1 to B-3, and C-1 to C-3) are provided as the effect modes of the setting suggestion effect, any of which It is determined based on the determination ratio according to the setting value prescribed in the setting indication effect determination table whether the setting indication effect of the aspect is to be executed. A plurality of presentation modes of setting indication effects and a setting indication effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates (or does not update) the setting indication history information based on the priority associated with each effect mode of the setting indication effect (1560 SS 03), and ends the setting indication effect determining process. Do. Here, the setting suggestion history information is information indicating an execution history of setting suggestion effects, and is information to be updated and stored in the RAM 122 according to a predetermined rule. In this embodiment, the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode (determined in step S1560 SS 02) executed this time is stored as setting suggestion history information, and the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode performed in the past If it is higher than the rank, the information of the setting suggestion effect of the presentation mode to be executed this time is overwritten and updated as setting suggestion history information (if not so, it is not updated). In addition, the detail of the priority matched for every production | presentation aspect of this setting suggestion production, and the detail of the overwrite update of setting suggestion log information are later mentioned with reference to FIGS. 10-2 and 10-8.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined timing according to the history (game history) in which the player has played a game, a preferable situation for the player (ending effect during the big hit game) and a situation undesirable for the player The setting suggestion effect is executed in any situation (when the number of times of fitting reaches a predetermined number of times). That is, regardless of whether the player is in a preferable situation or not, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the game history by advancing the game, thereby contributing to the motivation for the player to continue the game. Can improve the interest of

  In the above description, the fitting number is the cumulative execution number of variable display independent of the player, but may be the cumulative execution number of variable display depending on the player. That is, every time a player is replaced, the number of jams may be reset to indicate the number of jams of one player. Note that any method may be used to determine that the player has been replaced. For example, it may be determined that the player has been replaced when display of the customer waiting screen (menu screen or customer waiting demo screen) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). In addition, it may be determined that the player has been replaced when a period in which the operation of the bat operating handle is not detected continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). In addition, it may be determined that the player is replaced when the game end information is input by the player (for example, when issuance of a password accompanying the end of the game is instructed from the menu screen). Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with a face authentication sensor, and it may be determined that the player has been replaced by the face authentication sensor. Alternatively, the player may be able to reset the number of fit (for example, reset operation is possible from the menu screen).

(Other examples in which setting suggestion effects are executed)
Further, the predetermined timing at which the setting suggestion effect is performed is not limited to the example described above. For example, as a timing to be executed in a preferable situation for the player, when the total number of winning balls (number of winning balls won) obtained during consecutive runs exceeds a certain number (for example, 5,000 balls) or one round When the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening in the game exceeds the prescribed number (for example, 9) and wins (so-called, over winning), or when the game ball passes through a specific area (so-called, V winning) It may be when a V prize is won in a gaming machine (a so-called V positive gaming machine or two-type gaming machine) controlled to (probable variation state or big hit gaming state). In addition, as the timing to be executed in a situation undesirable for the player, in a gaming machine capable of being controlled to the probability variation latent state, when it is controlled to the probability variation latent state again after a big hit in the probability variation latent state (so-called latency loop) ), And to satisfy (break through) a predetermined breakthrough condition (for example, hitting a jackpot during a predetermined number of times) game is advantageous (for example, the number of times is increased or controlled to a definite change state) game In a game (so-called, breakthrough type game machine), when it is not possible to break through, or when a high expectation presentation (for example, reach production above a predetermined expectation) is executed, or when it is lost, a V prize can not be won It may be Also, as other timings, it is the timing at which the gaming ball is hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 first (so-called, in the morning) after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started at the start of business of the hall. In the customer waiting screen, it may be a timing when a predetermined button operation by the player (for example, an operation to select the execution of the setting suggestion effect) is performed, or a timing at which the predetermined prefetch effect is executed. May be

(Multiple effects of setting suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIG. 10B, a plurality of presentation modes of setting suggestion effects according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of systems (system A to system C) in the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and there are a plurality of effect modes for each system, and different contents are suggested according to the system. FIG. 10-2 (1) shows the effect mode of setting suggestion effect of A system, FIG. 10-2 (2) shows the effect mode of setting suggestion effect of B system, and FIG. 10-2 (3) is The production | presentation aspect of the setting suggestion production | presentation of C system | strains is shown.

(Setting suggestion production of production mode of A system)
Setting suggestion effect of the presentation aspect of A system is indicated by an icon with a shape, and indicates whether the setting value is an even value (“2”) or an odd value (“1” or “3”) It is an effect that Specifically, the setting suggestion effect A-1 of the effect mode of the A system is an icon of the display mode in which the shape is hatched inside the icon of O, and indicates that the setting value is an even value The setting suggestion effect A-2 of the effect mode of the A system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of the shape is blacked out, and suggests that the setting value is an odd value It is an effect.

(Setting suggestion production of production mode of B system)
The setting suggestion effect of the effect mode of the B system is displayed by an icon of a shape of □, and whether the setting value is advantageous (high setting) or disadvantageous (low setting) for the player It is an effect that suggests the level of the setting. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect B-1 of the effect mode of the B system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of the shape is outlined in white, and is an effect that suggests that the setting is low. The setting suggestion effect B-2 of the effect mode of the B system is an icon of a display mode in which the shape of the icon of □ is hatched inside, and is an effect that suggests that the setting is middle, and the B system The setting suggestion effect B-3 of the effect mode is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon having a square shape is blackened, and is an effect that suggests that the setting is high.

(Setting suggestion production of production mode of C system)
The setting suggestion effect of the effect mode of the C system is an effect that is displayed as an icon with a shape of Δ, and suggests an expectation that is a specific setting value (“3” in this example). Specifically, the setting suggestion effect C-1 of the effect mode of the C system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of shape Δ is white and the degree of expectation which is a specific setting value is low The setting suggestion effect C-2 of the effect mode of C system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of shape Δ is hatched, and the expectation is a specific setting value It is an effect that suggests that the effect is medium, and the setting indication effect C-3 of the effect mode of the C system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of shape Δ is blacked out, and the specific setting It is an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation that is a value is high.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of types of effect modes are classified into a plurality of lines, and the shape of the icon of the setting indication effect suggests which line of setting indication effects . And according to the system of setting indication production, the system of the contents of the suggestion which suggests setting value differs. That is, the A system indicates whether the setting value is even or odd, the B system indicates high and low of the setting value, and the C system indicates an expectation that is a specific setting value. As described above, since the system of the suggested content that suggests the setting value is different depending on which of the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the player can analyze the setting values in multiple ways. Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above, it is assumed that the line of setting indication effect is suggested by the shape of the icon of setting indication effect, and different contents in each line are suggested by the difference in the display mode (black etc.) . However, the system of the setting suggestion effect and the suggestion content in each system may be distinguishable as long as each can be discriminated, and is not limited to the one suggested by such an embodiment. For example, it is assumed that the setting suggestion effect is executed by the display of the character with the finger raised, the type of the character suggests the line of the setting indication effect, and the different contents in each line by the difference in the number of fingers made by the character. It may be suggested. Further, the system of the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the three systems described above, and may be two or four or more. Similarly, there may be four or more types of setting suggestion effects in each system.

(Priority)
As shown in FIG. 10-2, the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes are associated with priorities for each effect mode. Here, the priority is information referred to when overwriting setting / resetting history information to be described later, and is prioritized over setting suggestion effects of the effect mode performed in the past stored as setting suggestion history information. When a setting suggestion effect of a high (small number of priority numbers) effect mode is executed, the information of the setting suggestion effect is overwritten and updated on the setting suggestion history information. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, setting suggested effects C-3, B-3, C-2, when arranged in the order from the one with the highest priority (the one with the lowest priority). It becomes in order of B-2, A-2, A-1, C-1, and B-1.

  By the way, since the setting indication effect C-3 indicates that the expectation degree which is a specific setting value (setting value 3) is high, the indication content is advantageous for the player, and the setting indication effect B-3. The suggestion content is advantageous for the player because it also suggests that the setting is high. On the other hand, since the setting suggestion effect C-1 indicates that the degree of expectation which is a specific setting value (setting value 3) is low, the indication content is disadvantageous for the player, and the setting suggestion effect B-1 The suggested content is disadvantageous for the player because it also suggests that the setting is low. As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority of setting suggestion effects (C-3, B-3) of the effect mode in which the suggestion content is advantageous to the player is set high, and the suggestion content is disadvantageous to the player Setting priority of the setting suggestion effect (C-1, B-1) of the effect mode is set low. For example, although the setting suggestion effect A-2 suggests that the setting value is an odd value, whether the setting value is “1” (low setting) or “3” (high setting) I do not know there. As described above, since it is not possible to generally judge whether the setting suggestion effect A-2 is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player, the priority is set to a middle level ("5").

  From the above, when the setting suggestion effect of the rendering mode having a high priority is executed, the information of the setting suggestion effect is overwritten and updated on the setting suggestion history information, thereby setting the suggestion content which is advantageous for the player. The information of the suggestion effect is held as the setting suggestion history information. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the setting suggestion history display is performed based on the setting suggestion history information, suggestion contents advantageous to the player can be continuously displayed as the setting suggestion history display. It is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue the game.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 10-2, the setting indication effects A-1 and A-2 are effects that indicate the even value and the odd value of the setting value, respectively, and the setting indication effect B-1 , B-2 and B-3 are effects suggesting low setting, middle setting and high setting respectively, and setting suggestion effects C-1, C-2 and C-3 are respectively specific setting values “ This is an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation, which is 3 ", is low, moderate, or high. In this way, the setting suggestion effect of each production mode suggests different contents, each setting suggestion effect is determined based on the setting suggestion effect determination table at a different ratio according to the setting value actually set. Depends on Below, this setting suggestion production decision table is explained.

(Setting suggestion effect determination table)
FIG. 10C shows a setting suggestion effect determination table to be referred to when determining the setting suggestion effect of each effect mode according to the set value being set. As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the setting value is “1”, setting suggestion effects B-1, C-1, A-2, B-2, C-2 when arranged in descending order of the determination ratio. , B-3 and C-3 in this order. In addition, when the setting value is “2”, setting suggestion effects B-2, C-2, A-1, B-3, C-3, C-1, and B- are listed in ascending order of the determination ratio. It becomes order of 1. In addition, when the setting value is "3", setting suggestion effects C-3, B-3, C-2, B-2, A-2, C-2, B-1 are listed in ascending order of the determination ratio. It becomes order of 1.

  Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect B-1 or C-1 is executed, the setting value is likely to be "1" (however, the setting value may be "2" or "3"). . For this reason, the setting indication effect B-1 functions as an effect that indicates a low setting, and the setting indication effect C-1 functions as an effect that indicates that the expectation with a specific setting value “3” is low. . On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect C-3 or B-3 is executed, the setting value is highly likely to be “3” (however, the setting value may be “1” or “2”) . For this reason, the setting indication effect C-3 functions as an effect that indicates that the expectation that is a specific setting value "3" is high, and the setting indication effect B-3 functions as an effect that indicates high setting. . Also, when the setting suggestion effect B-2 or C-2 is executed, the setting value is highly likely to be "2" (however, the setting value may be "1" or "3") . For this reason, the setting indication effect B-2 functions as an effect that suggests middle setting, and the setting indication effect C-2 is an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation that is the specific setting value "3" is medium. Act as.

  When the setting value is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect A-1 is not determined, whereas when the setting value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect A-2 is not determined. Thus, the setting indication effect A-1 functions as an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even number, and the setting indication effect A-2 functions as an effect that indicates that the setting value is an odd value. In the present embodiment, since the set value can be set to “1” to “3”, the set value is “1” when the set value is suggested to be an odd value. If it is suggested that the set value is an even value while it is not known which of “3” is, it is suggested that the set value is “2”. For this reason, even when the setting value is "2", it may not necessarily be definitely suggested that the setting value is "2" as the setting suggestion effect A-2 is selectable. . Alternatively, it is assumed that the set value range can be set to “1” to “4”, and if it is suggested that the set value is an even value, the set value is “2” or “4”. You may not know which one.

  In addition, each determination ratio in the setting suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10C is merely an example, and may be appropriately changed in a range in which the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect of each effect mode is not changed.

(Description about setting suggestion history display)
Next, setting suggestion history display which is one of the effects relating to the characteristic portion 1560S will be described. The setting indication history display in the present embodiment is a display showing an execution history of setting indication effects. Since the element for determining the setting value is one of the pleasures for the player, the setting suggestion effect is also one of the pleasures for the player. However, this setting suggestion effect may be missed by some players because it is not known when it will be executed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, by making it possible to display the setting suggestion history display that is the execution history of the setting suggestion effect, it is executed in the past by confirming the setting suggestion history display even if the setting suggestion effect is missed. It becomes possible to confirm the setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history is displayed by displaying the past ending screen (screen displayed during ending effect) in the customer waiting state (while waiting for customers). Specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending effect, any one of the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes shown in FIG. Is displayed. For this reason, when the ending screen at this time is displayed again as the past ending screen, the setting suggestion effect displayed in the past ending screen is also displayed again. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect in the ending screen of the past displayed again functions as a setting suggestion history display indicating the execution history of the setting suggestion effect executed in the past. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10-8, in the present embodiment, although the setting suggestion history display indicates the execution history of setting suggestion effects executed in the past, it is not always executed latest. It does not indicate a setting suggestion effect.

(Variable display start waiting process)
Next, variable display start waiting processing will be described as the operation of the effect control means in the present characteristic portion 1560S. FIG. 10D is a flowchart showing a variable display start waiting process which is a part of the effect control main process in the characterizing portion 1560S.

  In the variable display start waiting process, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 1560 SS11).

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the customer waiting screen (menu screen or customer waiting demo screen) (step 1560 SS16). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 1560 SS17), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 1560 SS18), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to start setting suggested history display (step 1560 SS12). Specifically, when the predetermined menu screen (see FIG. 10-7 (1) described later) is displayed in the customer waiting state, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's button (for example, the push button 31B). When a determination operation is performed on a predetermined selection item (an item of an ending screen history shown in FIG. 10-7 (1) described later) by the operation of, it is determined that the setting suggestion history display is started.

  If it is determined that the setting suggestion history display is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the setting suggestion history display based on the setting suggestion history information stored in the RAM 122 (step S1560 SS13). For example, when the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored as the setting suggestion history information, a display indicating that the setting suggestion effect B-2 has been executed as the setting suggestion history display on the ending screen in the past Is performed (for example, similarly to the setting suggestion effect B-2, an icon having a hatched display mode is displayed inside the icon having a square shape).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to end the setting suggestion history display (step 1560 SS14). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion history display is to be ended when a predetermined operation to finish the setting suggestion history display (for example, a decision operation on the selection item “return”) is performed ( 1560 SS 14).

  If it is determined that the setting suggestion history display is to be ended or it is not determined to start the setting suggestion history display, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined customer waiting screen (menu screen or customer waiting demo screen). It displays (step S1560 SS13), and ends variable display start waiting processing. If it is not determined that the setting suggestion history display is to be ended, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the processing of step 1560 SS14 until it is determined that the setting suggestion history display is to be ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the setting suggestion history display which is the execution history of the setting suggestion effect is performed by the operation of the player while waiting for a customer, even if the player misses the setting suggestion effect, It is possible to confirm the setting suggestion effect executed in the past by the operation of oneself. In addition, for example, since the execution history of the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed while waiting for a guest even at a vacant platform, it can help to determine whether or not to play a game based on this execution history. The game motive can be enhanced.

(Other examples where setting suggestion history display is executed)
The condition for starting the setting suggestion history display (the display of the customer waiting screen in the past) is not limited to the above-described example. For example, the setting suggestion history is automatically (regardless of the player's operation) when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the customer waiting state is started (or after the customer waiting demonstration effect is started) The display may be started. Similarly, the condition for ending the setting suggestion history display is not limited to the above example. For example, the setting suggestion history display may be automatically ended when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) elapses after the setting suggestion history display is started. Further, the setting suggestion history display may not be executed in the customer waiting state, but may be executed in the variable display or in the big hit game. As an example executed during the variable display, for example, it may be arbitrarily displayable by the operation of the player during the variable display. As an example executed during the big hit game, the setting suggestion history display may be executed by redisplaying the ending screen of the past in the opening during the big hit game. Further, as in the case where the setting suggestion effect is performed, the setting suggestion history display may also be performed at various timings in a preferable situation for the player or at various timings in a situation unfavorable for the player.

(Display of setting suggestion history information at power on)
Next, setting suggestion history display accompanying start (ON) / stop (OFF) of power supply of pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  Since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by the power supply, the setting suggestion history information stored in the RAM 122 is when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (when it is turned off) Cleared Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when it is turned on), the setting suggestion history information is not stored in the RAM 122. For this reason, on the effect control board 12 side, even if power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (for example, even if a command at the time of recovery is received from the main board 11 in command analysis processing) setting suggestion history information The effect based on (for example, setting suggestion history display) is not performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the power backup of the RAM 122 is not performed, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the setting suggestion history information stored in the past is retained. Therefore, the effect based on the past setting suggestion history information is not performed. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with the RAM 122 whose power is backed up.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RAM 122 with the power supply backed up, the setting suggestion history information stored in the RAM 122 is held even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (when it is turned off). Be backed up. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when it is turned on), the setting suggestion history information is stored in the RAM 122. Therefore, on the effect control board 12 side, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (for example, when a command at the time of recovery is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process) It becomes possible to perform an effect (for example, setting suggestion history display) which suggests setting value based on it. For this reason, for example, it is possible to suggest the setting value based on the execution history of the setting suggestion effect performed on the previous day. As described above, the suggestion of the setting value is performed when the power supply is started, which makes it possible to increase the game motive of the player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the RAM 122 backed up by the power supply, the effect based on the backed up setting suggestion history information is executed because the setting value is not changed and the power supply is not performed without the RAM clear processing. It may be only when it is started (ie, when recovery processing is performed). That is, when the setting value is changed or the RAM clear process is performed, even if the setting suggestion history information is backed up, the effect indicating the setting value is not performed based on the setting suggestion history information It is good also as things.

  In addition, at the time of the power supply start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect which suggests a setting value based on the present setting value is good also as what is performed. For example, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started at the start of operation of the hall (so-called, in the morning), a lottery corresponding to the currently set setting value indicates a predetermined setting value indicative of the current setting value. A presentation may be performed. As described above, by suggesting the setting value in the morning, it is suggested that the vacant table may be a good table, and it is possible to increase the game motive of the player. In addition, when the setting value of the previous day is changed, a predetermined effect that suggests the current setting value may not be performed in the morning. In other words, only when the setting value of the previous day is not changed, a predetermined effect that suggests the current setting value may be performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an excessive sense of expectation that the setting value has been changed.

(Example of rendering operation of the characteristic portion 1560S)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 10-5 shows an example of the setting suggestion effect performed during the variable display, and FIG. 10-6 shows an example of the setting suggestion effect performed during the big hit game (ending effect), FIG. These show an example of the setting suggestion history display performed while waiting for a customer.

(Setting indication effect during variable display)
During the variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (1), for example, the variable display at the 499th time of the fitting ends (ends with a miss), as shown in FIG. 10-5 (2), When variable display is started when the number of fitting times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect 1560S10) is executed on the upper right portion of the effect display device 5. Specifically, for example, when the current setting value is “2”, for example, the setting suggestion effect C-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 22% based on the setting suggestion effect determining table shown in FIG. 10-3. As a result, as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10, an icon of a display mode with diagonal lines is displayed inside the icon of shape Δ.

  The timing at which the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 is displayed is not limited to the start timing of the variable display, but may be a predetermined timing during the variable display or an end timing of the variable display.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation undesirable for the player (when the number of times of fit reaches a predetermined number), so the current situation It is possible to make the player expect the situation to improve in the future even if C. is not preferable, and it can be a cause of the motive to continue the game.

(Setting suggestion production in the big hit game)
During the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), for example, the round game of the final round (for example, 16R) is over, and as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the ending effect is When it is started, the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect 1560S10) is executed on the upper right portion (the upper right portion of the ending screen) of the effect display device 5. Specifically, for example, when the current setting value is “2”, for example, the setting suggestion effect C-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 22% based on the setting suggestion effect determining table shown in FIG. 10-3. As a result, an icon of a display mode in which a hatched shape is attached is displayed as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 inside the icon having a shape of Δ.

  The timing at which the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 is displayed is not limited to the start timing of the ending effect, but may be a predetermined timing during the ending effect.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, as in the case of a big hit game, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a preferable situation for the player, so the present preferable situation is not due to the setting value suggested by the setting suggestion effect It is possible to make the heel player look forward, which can be a cause of the player's motivation to continue the game. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed in all ending effects, but the setting effect is set only in the ending effect based on a specific big hit (for example, the big hit among the multiple big hits). Suggested rendition may be performed. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the sense of scarcity for the setting suggestion effect, and to further enhance the interest of the game.

(Display setting suggestion history)
In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the predetermined menu screen is displayed by the player performing a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the push button 31B). On this menu screen, a plurality of selection items selectable by the player are displayed, and when the player determines one of the selection items, a screen corresponding to the determined selection item is displayed. The plurality of selection items include an ending screen history item as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), and when this item is determined, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2) The past ending screen is displayed. Then, as described above, the setting suggestion history display (setting suggestion history display 1560S20) is displayed in the ending screen of the past. Specifically, for example, when information of setting indication effect C-2 is stored as setting indication history information in RAM 112 based on execution of setting indication effect C-2, setting indication history display is performed. As 1560S20, as the setting suggestion effect C-2 is executed, the icon of the display mode (the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-2) having a hatched shape is displayed inside the icon of shape Δ Be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the setting suggestion history display is performed by displaying the ending screen history (the past ending screen) while waiting for a customer, even if the setting suggestion effect is missed, it is executed in the past. The execution history of the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed, and it can be used as an aid in determining whether to continue the game.

  In FIG. 10-7 (2), the ending screen (the total number of balls obtained) and the ending screen actually displayed in the past as the ending screen history (the ending screen in the past) That is, the ending screen itself shown in FIG. 10-6 (2) is displayed again. However, the ending screen history may be displayed as long as the setting suggestion effect in the ending screen functioning as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 is displayed, and other effects such as the ball display may be omitted as appropriate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed by displaying the ending screen in the past, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a history display screen may be separately provided to display an execution history of setting suggestion effects executed so far, and the history display screen may be displayed by an operation of a player waiting for a customer.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed while waiting for a customer, but the setting suggestion effect may be performed while waiting for a customer. Specifically, based on the player's operation, an effect to draw the fortune is executed, and the set value "1" is expected if the fortune is "Daikichi", and the set value "2" if the fortune is "Nakakichi" "" Is expected, and a setting suggestion effect may be performed such that the setting value "3" is expected if the fortune is "Okichi". As described above, by configuring the setting suggestion effect to be executable while waiting for a customer, it is possible to provide game characteristics even while waiting for a customer, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Displaying setting suggestion history during variable display)
Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed while waiting for a customer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed during variable display. Specifically, during execution of the variable display, ON / OFF of the setting suggestion history display may be switched by a predetermined switching operation of the player (for example, switching operation by the push button 31B). By doing this, the player can check the setting suggestion history display even during the game, so it can help to determine whether to continue the game while playing the game.

  In addition, as described above, when setting suggestion history display can be executed during variable display, the visibility of the effect based on the variable display is impeded by the setting suggestion history display being switched ON, and the effect It may not be possible to bring attention to For this reason, during variable display, there are conditions under which the setting suggestion history display can be switched to ON (hereinafter referred to as permission conditions) and conditions limiting the switching of the setting suggestion history display to ON (hereinafter referred to as restriction conditions) It is preferable that it is set. As the permission condition, a condition when it is not necessary to pay attention to the effect based on the variable display may be set. Specifically, as the permission condition, the variable display being executed is a variable display of a loss that does not include the reach, a period before the reach effect is performed, and the pre-reading effect is not executed. And the like. In addition, as the restriction condition, a condition when it is necessary to pay attention to the effect based on the variable display may be set. Specifically, as a limiting condition, it is a period during which a specific reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) is being executed, that a pending change effect is being executed, or a pre-reading continuous notice effect is executed. And the operation period of the movable role (the movable effect device), and the execution period of the effect accompanied by the operation of the player (the operation effect). As described above, by setting the permission condition and the prohibition condition, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion history display during variable display, and also ensure the visibility of the effect based on the variable display that the user wants to pay attention to.

(Update setting suggestion history information)
Next, the overwrite update of the setting suggestion history information will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history information is updated based on the priority (see FIG. 10-2) associated with each of the presentation modes of the setting suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot hit for the first time after the start of power supply, and in the ending effect during the jackpot game, setting suggestion effect 1560S10 as setting suggestion effect 1 B It is assumed that -2 has been executed. Then, since nothing is stored as setting suggestion history information, information on setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as setting suggestion history information. In addition, when the RAM 112 is backed up by a power source, it may be overwritten and updated based on the priority of the setting suggestion effect and the priority of the setting suggestion effect B-2 stored as backup setting history information as backup. May be determined.

  As described above, when the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored as the setting suggestion history information in the RAM 112, the ending screen is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end effect for which the setting suggestion effect B-2 described above is performed. When the history is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20, as the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed, a hatched line is inside the icon of the shape of □. The icon of the attached display mode (the same mode as the setting suggestion effect B-2) is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second big hit is performed, and the priority is set to “7” as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending production during the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggested effect C-1 has been executed. Then, since information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored as the setting suggestion history information, the priority "4" of the setting suggestion effect B-2 and the priority of the setting suggestion effect C-1 executed this time are given. The rank "7" is compared, and the setting suggestion history information is not overwritten and updated because the priority of the setting suggestion effect C-1 executed this time is lower.

  As described above, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 is not updated as the setting suggestion history information, and the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 remains stored in the RAM 112. For this reason, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the ending effect is performed when the above-described setting suggestion effect C-1 is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 In order to indicate that the setting suggestion effect B-2 has been executed, the display of the same mode as the setting suggestion effect B-2 is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (3), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the third big hit is performed, and the priority is set to "3" as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending production during the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggested effect C-2 has been executed. Then, since information of the setting indication effect B-2 is stored as setting indication history information, the priority "4" of the setting indication effect B-2 and the priority of the setting indication effect C-2 executed this time are given. The rank "3" is compared, and the setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated because the priority of the setting suggestion effect C-2 executed this time is higher.

  As described above, when the information of the setting suggestion effect C-2 is overwritten and updated on the RAM 112 as setting suggestion history information, the ending is in the waiting state after the end effect for which the setting suggestion effect C-2 is executed. When the screen history is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20, as indicated by the setting suggestion effect C-2 being executed, the shape is shaded inside the icon with a triangle. The icon of the display mode with the mark (the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-2) is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the executed effect mode is
The setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated when it is higher than the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode performed in the past stored as the setting suggestion history information. For this reason, the setting suggestion history information is to be updated to the information of setting suggestion effect of the rendering mode having a high priority, and thus, the setting suggestion history of the rendering mode having a high priority is executed as the setting suggestion history display. The history will be displayed. Then, in the present embodiment, since the suggested content is advantageous for the player in the setting suggestion effect of the rendering mode having a high priority, the suggested content which is advantageous for the player can be continuously displayed as the setting suggested history display. It is possible to raise the player's willingness to continue playing the game (it is not updated to suggestions that are disadvantageous to the player).

(Modified example of overwrite update)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the overwrite update of the setting suggestion history information has the priority order defined for each of the presentation modes of the setting suggestion effect (more specifically, the suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect is advantageous Although it shall be executed based on the degree), it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the priority order, the setting suggestion history information may be overwritten and updated on the information of the setting suggestion effect that has been executed each time the setting suggestion effect is executed. In this case, the setting suggestion history display executed based on the setting suggestion history information indicates the execution history of the setting suggestion effect most recently executed.

(Another example of priority)
Further, in the present embodiment, the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode in which the suggestion content is advantageous to the player is high, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode having a high possibility of suggesting the actual setting value may be high. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, when the setting value is “1”, the setting suggestion effect B-1 may possibly indicate the actual setting value “1”. Since it is the highest, in the case of the setting value “1”, the priority of the setting suggestion effect B-1 is set to “1”. Also, in the case where the setting value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect B-2 is most likely to indicate the actual setting value “2”, so in the case of the setting value “2”, The priority of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is set to "1". Also, if the setting value is “3”, the setting suggestion effect C-3 is most likely to indicate the actual setting value “3”, so in the case of the setting value “3”, The priority of the setting suggestion effect C-3 is set to "1". As described above, when the priority order of setting suggestion effect of each effect mode is set according to the actual setting value, the overwrite updating of the setting suggestion history information is executed based on the priority order, thereby setting the actual setting value. Suggested content that is highly likely to be suggested can be continuously displayed as a set suggested history display, and it is possible to increase the accuracy of estimating the set value.

  In the above embodiment, the execution history of one setting suggestion effect executed in the past is updated and stored as the setting suggestion history information, but the execution history of multiple setting suggestion effects is updated and stored. It is possible that the display may be performed and a display indicating the execution history of the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times may be performed as the setting suggestion history display. Below, with reference to FIGS. 10-9 and FIGS. 10-10, the example which can update-store the execution history of three times of setting suggestion effects as setting suggestion history information is explained.

(Display multiple setting suggestion history)
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot hit for the first time after the start of power supply, and in the ending effect during the big hit game, setting suggestion effect B of priority “4” as setting suggestion effect 1560S10. It is assumed that -2 has been executed. Then, since nothing is stored as the setting suggestion history information, the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the first setting suggestion history information.

  As described above, when the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the first setting suggestion history information, the waiting state after the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect B-2 described above is executed is waited When the ending screen history is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), setting is made in the right frame as a setting suggestion history display 1560S20 having three display frames (left frame, middle frame, right frame). A mode similar to the setting suggestion effect B-2 is displayed so as to indicate that the suggestion effect B-2 has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second big hit is performed, and the priority is set to “7” as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending production in the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggested effect C-1 has been executed. Then, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 is stored in the RAM 112 as second setting suggestion history information.

  Thus, after the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the first setting suggestion history information, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 is stored in the RAM 112 as the second setting suggestion history information Be done. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end effect is performed when the setting suggestion effect C-1 described above is performed, three display frames are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B). A mode similar to the setting suggestion effect B-2 displayed in the right frame as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided is moved and displayed in the middle frame, and the setting suggestion effect C-1 is newly executed in the right frame. The same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-1 is displayed to indicate that it has been done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the third big hit is performed, and the priority is set to “3” as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending production in the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggested effect C-2 has been executed. Then, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the third setting suggestion history information.

  Thus, after the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 and the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 are stored in the RAM 112 as the first and second setting suggestion history information, the setting suggestion effect C-2 Is stored in the RAM 112 as the third setting suggestion history information. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the ending effect is performed when the setting suggestion effect C-2 described above is executed, three display frames are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-9 (C). A mode similar to the setting suggestion effects B-2 and C-1 displayed in the middle frame and the right frame as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided is moved and displayed in the left frame and the middle frame, and the right frame is displayed in the right frame. The same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-2 is displayed so as to indicate that the setting suggestion effect C-2 is newly executed.

  As described above, when it is possible to update and store the execution history of the setting indication effect a plurality of times (three times in this example) as setting indication history information, the setting indication effect of a plurality of times is indicated as the setting indication history display 1560S20. As the execution history is indicated from left to right, a display indicating the execution history of a plurality of setting suggestion effects is performed so as to indicate that it has been performed.

(Updating multiple setting suggestion history information)
Next, overwrite update of setting indication history information when setting indication effect is executed exceeding the number of times of execution of setting indication effect which can be stored as setting indication history information (three times in this example) will be described. 10-10 (1a) and (A) show an example of overwriting and updating based on the priority order of setting suggestion effects, and FIGS. 10-10 (1 b) and (B) execute setting suggestion effects An example of overwriting and updating every time is shown. 10-10 (1a) and (1b) are effects to be executed after FIG. 10-9 (3).

  First, an example of overwriting and updating based on the priority order of setting suggestion effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (1a), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fourth jackpot is performed, and the setting priority rendering is “6” as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. It is assumed that -1 has been executed. At this time, since the information of the setting suggestion effects B-2, C-1, and C-2 is stored as the setting suggestion history information, the priorities "4", "7", "" of the setting suggestion effects are stored. "3" and the priority "6" of the setting suggestion effect A-1 executed this time are compared. As a result, as setting history information, information of setting suggestion effect C-1 (priority "7") lower than priority "6" of setting suggestion effect A-1 of this time is information of setting suggestion effect A-1 Is overwritten and updated. In addition, among a plurality of setting indication effects stored as setting indication history information, when there are a plurality of setting indication effects lower than the priority order of the present setting indication effect, the setting having the lower priority order is the current setting The information of the suggested effect may be overwritten and updated. Further, when all of the plurality of setting suggestion effects stored as the setting suggestion history information is higher than the priority of the setting suggestion effect of this time, the setting suggestion history information may not be overwritten and updated.

  In this manner, the information of the setting suggestion effect A-1 is overwritten and updated on the RAM 112 as setting suggestion history information, whereby the setting suggestion effect B-2, C-2, A- is set as setting suggestion history information in the RAM 112. Information 1 is stored. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end effect is performed when the setting suggestion effect A-1 described above is performed, three display frames are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A). A mode similar to the setting suggestion effect C-1 with low priority displayed in the middle frame as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided is deleted, and the same as the setting suggestion effect C-2 displayed in the right frame The mode is moved and displayed in the middle frame, and in the right frame, a mode similar to the setting suggestion effect A-1 is displayed so as to indicate that the setting suggestion effect A-1 is newly executed.

  As described above, when a plurality of setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated based on the priority, the priority order of the setting suggestion effect of the performed rendering mode is stored in the past as setting suggestion history information The setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated when the priority is given higher than any of the priorities of the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes performed. In addition, as the setting suggestion history display, after the display indicating the execution history of the setting suggestion effect overwritten and updated (erased) is erased, the display indicating the execution history of the other setting suggestion effect is left-justified and displayed Be done. Therefore, the display order of the execution histories of the plurality of setting indication effects displayed as the setting indication history display also suggests the execution order of the setting indication effects. It should be noted that the display history showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect of this time is directly displayed at the display position showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect which has been overwritten (erased) without being displayed left-justified as described above. It may be used.

  Next, an example will be described in which overwriting is updated each time the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (1b), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fourth jackpot is performed, and the setting priority rendering is “6” as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. It is assumed that -1 has been executed. At this time, information on setting suggestion effects B-2, C-1, and C-2 is stored as setting suggestion history information, but the information on setting suggestion effect B-2 stored the oldest is erased. Instead, information of the setting suggestion effect A-1 executed this time is newly stored.

  Thus, the information of the setting suggestion effect A-1 is overwritten and updated on the RAM 112 as the setting suggestion history information, whereby the setting suggestion effect C-1, C-2, A- is set as the setting suggestion history information in the RAM 112. Information 1 is stored. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end effect is performed when the above-described setting suggestion effect A-1 is executed, three display frames are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B). The mode of the oldest stored setting suggestion effect B-2 displayed in the left frame as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 included is deleted, and the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-1 displayed in the middle frame Is moved and displayed in the left frame, the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-2 displayed in the right frame is moved and displayed in the middle frame, and the setting suggestion effect A-1 is newly realized in the right frame As shown, the same mode as the setting suggestion effect A-1 is displayed.

  As described above, when a plurality of setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated each time the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion history display executed based on the setting suggestion history information is performed three times most recently executed. It will show the execution history of the setting suggestion effect of.

  In the above-described embodiment, information of setting suggestion effect executed in ending effect is stored as setting suggestion history information, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the information of the setting indication effect performed in the ending effect, the information of the setting indication effect performed during the variable display, and the information of the setting indication effect performed in other situations (for example, waiting for customers) Also, it may be stored as setting suggestion history information. In addition, as described above, when setting suggestion history information is stored in various different situations (during ending, variable display, waiting for customers), setting suggestion history information is stored for each situation, and setting suggestion is made. As the history display, a display indicating an execution history of the setting suggestion effect may be performed for each situation. A specific example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 10-11.

(Display setting suggestion history for each category)
In FIG. 10-11, setting suggestion effects are performed in three different situations (hereinafter referred to as categories) such as ending effect, variable display, and other situations (for example, waiting for customers), and setting is made for each category An example is shown in which suggestion history information is stored, and setting suggestion history display is performed for each category.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when setting suggestion history display is performed in each of a plurality of categories, for example, on a predetermined menu screen in a customer waiting state, as one of a plurality of selection items, The item of suggestion history is included, and when this item is decided, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), “Today's suggestion history” screen is displayed, which displays setting suggestion history for each category . Then, in the “proposal history screen of the present day”, the execution histories of the setting suggestion effect performed during the ending, the setting suggestion effect performed during the variable display, and the setting suggestion effect performed in other situations are respectively It is displayed as setting suggestion history display 1560S20 so that distinction is possible.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 10-11, as the setting indication history display 1560S20, the execution history of the setting indication effect during the ending indicates that the setting indication effect A-2 has been executed (the inside of the icon with a shape of 〇 Is displayed with a black display icon) and the execution history of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display indicates that the setting suggestion effect C-1 has been executed (the inside of the icon of the shape is Δ is A mode (indicated by a shaded square) with an execution history of the setting suggestion effect in other situations indicating that the setting suggestion effect B-2 has been executed. Icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, the setting suggestion effect B-1 is executed during the ending, and the setting suggestion effect A-1 is assumed to be executed during the variable display. Then, for each category, the priority of the setting suggestion effect performed in the past stored as setting suggestion history information is compared with the priority of the present setting suggestion effect, and when the priority is high, Setting suggestion history information in the category is overwritten and updated. Specifically, during the ending, the priority "8" of the present setting indication effect B-1 is lower than the priority "5" of the setting indication effect A-2 stored as setting indication history information Therefore, the setting suggestion history information is not overwritten and updated, and the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 during ending does not change (is continued). On the other hand, during variable display, the priority "6" of the present setting suggestion effect A-1 is higher than the priority "7" of the setting suggestion effect C-1 stored as the setting suggestion history information, The setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated, and the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 during the variable display is a mode indicating that the setting suggestion effect A-1 has been executed (a display mode in which the inside of the icon with a shape is shaded) Icon is displayed.

  Even when setting suggestion history display is performed in each of a plurality of categories, setting suggestion history display is performed for each category instead of being overwritten and updated based on the priority for each category as described above. It may be overwritten and updated every time. Further, it is possible to store a plurality of setting suggestion history information for each category, and it is also possible to display the execution history of the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times for each category.

  Further, the category and the system of setting suggestion effects may be associated with each other. Specifically, it is assumed that the setting suggestion effect of the A system is executed during the ending, the setting suggestion effect of the B system is executed during the variable display, and in other situations, the C system The setting suggestion effect may be performed. Also, this correspondence may not necessarily be one-to-one correspondence. In addition, it may be possible to have a setting suggestion effect of a system that is executed only in a specific category. For example, the setting suggestion effect of the A system may be performed during variable display but may not be performed in other categories.

  Also, the category described above may be any type, for example, the category may be set according to the gaming state, or the category may be set according to the rendering mode being executed. The category may be set according to whether or not a specific effect (for example, pre-reading effect) is being executed, or depending on the preferable and unfavorable conditions for the player as described above. A category may be set.

(Modification of feature 1560S)
It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may have the minimum necessary configuration when performing the rendering of the feature portion 1560S, and may not have all the configurations as described in the feature portion 121IW. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be any pachinko gaming machine capable of setting at least a setting value, and, for example, the setting value is “1” <“2” <“3” as described in the feature portion 121IW. In the order of “1”, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may not be extended.

  In the above embodiment, any one of the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes is determined and can be executed at the timing at which the setting suggestion effect can be executed. When the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed once, the same setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect B-) is performed until execution of a specific setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect C-3) is determined. 2) may be continued (in other words, the execution of another setting suggestion effect is prohibited). In this way, the setting suggestion history display also does not change until a specific setting suggestion effect is executed. The specific setting indication effect in this case may be a setting indication effect that suggests content more advantageous to the player than the indication content of the setting indication effect that has already been executed. In this way, since the setting suggestion effect does not change unless the setting suggestion effect that suggests content advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player.

  In the above embodiment, one of the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes is determined and can be executed at the timing at which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, but until a specific timing arrives The setting suggestion effect executed once may be continued. That is, for example, when the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed in the first ending effect, the setting suggestion effect B-2 is continued also in the subsequent ending effect until the specific timing comes (others (others) The execution of the setting suggestion effect may be prohibited. As a specific timing in this case, it is rare timing for the player (for example, when the number of consecutive passes exceeds 10 times, or when the total number of winning balls obtained in the big hit game exceeds 10000). It may be In this way, since the setting suggestion effect changes only at a rare timing for the player, it is possible to give a sense of scarcity also to the changed setting suggestion effect.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion history display can be displayed at any time by the player's operation in the customer waiting state, but can be displayed as a bonus to the player when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is good also as things. Specifically, when points acquired with the progress of the game reach a predetermined value, the setting suggestion history display may be executable as a bonus to the player. In addition, when a rare effect (for example, a full rotation effect) is executed, the setting suggestion history display may be executable as a privilege for the player. In addition, when the number of consecutive recordings reaches a predetermined number (for example, ten times), the setting suggestion history display may be executable as a bonus to the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the setting suggestion effect is performed during the ending effect and during the variable display, the setting suggestion history display may be performed instead of the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, at a predetermined timing of executing setting indication effects such as during ending effect and variable display, any one of setting indication effects of a plurality of effect modes is determined by a predetermined lottery, and the determined setting If the priority order of the suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion history information may be updated, and the setting suggestion history display may be executed based on the updated setting suggestion history information. That is, although the setting suggestion history information is not updated in the customer waiting state, the setting suggestion history display can be executed, but the setting suggestion history information can be updated during the ending effect and during the variable display. The setting suggestion history display may be executable.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is determined based on the same setting suggestion effect determination table (refer to FIG. 10-3) regardless of what kind of situation is performed. The setting suggestion effect determination table to be referred to may be different depending on the situation to be executed. Specifically, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation undesirable for the player (for example, when the number of fit reaches a predetermined number), the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion content advantageous to the player is easily selected The suggested presentation determination table may be referred to. By doing this, even when the player is playing a game in an unfavorable situation, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for continuing the game. On the contrary, in a situation undesirable for the player, a setting suggestion effect determination table may be referred to in which setting suggestion effects of suggestion contents advantageous to the player are hard to be selected. By doing this, when the player is playing a game in an unfavorable situation, the player can change to another game stand, triggered by the setting suggestion effect. Further, for example, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in a preferable situation (for example, during ending effect) for the player, the setting suggestion effect determination table in which the setting suggestion effect having a high possibility of suggesting the actual setting value is easily selected May be referred to. By doing this, the setting suggestion effect can be functioned as a benefit in a preferable situation.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the setting suggestion effect is performed in any of a plurality of setting suggestion effects regardless of what kind of situation is performed, it is performed in any situation The setting suggestion effects that can be performed may be different depending on the item. Specifically, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation undesirable for the player (for example, when the number of fit reaches a predetermined number), the player is only suggested a more implicit set value. Thus, for example, only setting suggestion effects of the B system may be performed.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting suggestion production | presentation and the setting suggestion log | history display were demonstrated as a display production | presentation in the production display apparatus 5, not only such a production | presentation, for example, a lamp display may be sufficient. Specifically, for example, a lamp display unit is provided in the lower part of the effect display device 5, and the color of the lamp display unit suggests a system of setting suggestion effect, and the lighting pattern of the color of the lamp display unit (for example, always display, blink Etc.) may indicate different contents in each system. The lamp display unit can also function as a setting suggestion history display by displaying the setting suggestion history display at the same time as the setting suggestion effect. In addition, by providing a plurality of lamp display portions, it is possible to function as a setting suggestion history display indicating the execution history of setting suggestion effects a plurality of times or to function as a setting suggestion history display for each category.

(Description of means related to the feature 1560S)
With regard to the above characteristic portion 1560S, according to the related art, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (prior art 1), in a gaming machine capable of changing setting values, variable according to the setting values before changing and the setting values after changing. During execution of the display, it is stated that the display of the giraffe, the elephant, or the lion suggests the set value. However, in the prior art 1 described above, even if it is possible to suggest the set value, there is a possibility that the display suggesting the set value may be missed, and it is not always possible to improve the interest of the game . The gaming machine of means A1 according to the above-mentioned characterizing portion 1560S (first embodiment) solves this problem,
According to the gaming machine of means A1,
It is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting values,
Setting suggestion effect execution means for executing any one of a plurality of setting suggestion effects which indicate which setting value is set at a different ratio according to the set value,
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
After executing the first setting suggestion effect that performs the first suggestion, the first setting suggestion effect is continued until the second setting suggestion effect that performs the second suggestion different from the first suggestion is performed. (For example, after the first setting suggestion effect is executed, until the second setting suggestion effect of higher priority than the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion history information is not overwritten and updated, so that the first setting is made. The execution history of the suggestion effect is continuously displayed),
It was characterized.
According to this feature, by continuing the first setting indication effect until the second setting indication effect is executed, the player can continuously confirm the indication (first indication) of the setting value. , You can improve the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of means A2 is the gaming machine of means A1, and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
As the setting suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects (for example, A system to C system shown in FIG. 10-2) in which systems suggesting setting values are different,
It was characterized.
According to this feature, since the system that suggests the setting value is different depending on which of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects is executed, the player can analyze the setting value in various ways, and it is possible to It can improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means A3 is the gaming machine of means A1 or A2, and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The setting suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, during ending effect or variable display in which the number of times of fitting has reached a predetermined value) according to the game history.
It was characterized.
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the game history by advancing the game, it contributes to the motivation for the player to continue the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Also, the gaming machine of means A4 is any gaming machine of means A1 to A3, and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
It is possible to display a setting indication history (for example, setting indication history display 1560S20) which is an execution history of the setting indication effect,
It was characterized.
According to this feature, since the execution history of the setting suggestion effect is known, it is possible for the player to analyze the setting value in various ways based on the setting suggestion effect executed in the past, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can.

The gaming machine of means A5 is any gaming machine of means A1 to A4, and
The storage means for storing information on the executed setting suggestion effect when the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off,
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
When the game machine is powered on, the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the information stored in the storage means.
It was characterized.
According to this feature, since the suggestion of the setting value is performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to increase the game motive of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A6 is the gaming machine of means A4, and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The content suggested by the setting suggestion effect newly executed is more advantageous for the player than the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect displayed as the setting suggestion history (for example, the priority shown in FIG. 10-2) Is high), the execution history of the setting indication effect newly executed is overwritten and displayed on the setting indication history,
The content suggested by the setting suggestion effect newly executed is more disadvantageous for the player than the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect displayed as the setting suggestion history (for example, the priority shown in FIG. 10-2) Is low), the execution history of the setting suggestion effect newly executed is not displayed over the setting suggestion history (for example, see FIG. 10-18),
It was characterized.
According to this feature, since the history of the setting suggestion effect with which the suggested content is advantageous (for example, expecting high setting value) remains to be displayed, it is possible to increase the player's game motivation (a feeling of expectation) Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Description of the presentation about feature part 121IW)
Next, an effect (effect according to the feature portion 121IW) according to the second embodiment performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting the setting value as described in the feature portion 121IW will be described.

(Effect mode change process)
First, the operation of the effect control means in the present characteristic portion 121IW will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart showing a part of effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 121IW. In the main feature portion 121IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode changing process for changing the effect mode when the effect control random number updating process in step S77 is performed (step 121IWS201), and then, It returns to the process of step S73.

  The feature portion 121IW can control three types of effect modes of the effect mode A to the effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters that appear in the preliminary production and reach production are different. Step 121 In the effect mode change process of IWS 201, when the predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change the current effect mode to a different effect mode. For example, when a real time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date or time based on the date and time information from the real time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that the effect mode is determined to be changed.

  In step 121IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set, and a flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set, and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A → ... It may be changed at random from the modes A to C.

(Command analysis process)

  11-2 to 11-4 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). Although the effect control command received from the main substrate 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121 IWS 301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121 IWS 302). Incidentally, when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 121 IWS 303). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 121 IWS 304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 121 IWS 305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the game machine is powered on (step 121 IWS 306).

  In the feature portion 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by the power supply, the set value and set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied with power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the process is started with no setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 and the setting value command reception flag also cleared. Ru. Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is performed. It may be configured to always transmit the setting value command when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the feature portion 121IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is performed after the game machine is powered on, but the setting value command is normal due to a missing command or data corruption. If it can not be received, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed, and the setting value is not stored in the setting value storage area. However, in the feature portion 121IW, even if the setting value command can not be received normally when the power is turned on, the setting value command is transmitted for each variable display, so the process of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the setting value command received thereafter. The setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

  Also, even if the setting value command is received, it is conceivable that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, so when the setting control command is read on the CPU 120 for effect control, It may be configured to determine whether the included set value is a normal value. For example, in the present example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value of “1” to “3”, but “5”, “10”, etc. are set and include values having no margin. If it is determined, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and thereafter, when a new setting value command is received, the setting value command newly received is used. If the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, even if it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is also assumed that the setting value command can not be received normally, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the present characteristic portion 121IW. It may be configured to

(Initial appearance setting)
In the feature control portion 12 IW, when any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting check processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the side of the production control board 12 The control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols and displayed on the image display 5 until the first variable display is started) in the image display 5 Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance effect).

  If the received effect control command is the setting change processing end command (step 121 IWS 307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, using the initial appearance determination table, the combination of an even initial appearance (for example, "246", "224", etc.) which is a combination of an even decorative design and an odd decorative design A certain odd initial appearance (for example, "135", "113", etc.) and a special initial appearance which is a combination of decorative designs including special designs (for example, star design) are determined (step 121 IWS 309) . And it transfers to step 121 IWS314.

  FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram of an example of an initial appearance determination table. In step 121 IWS 309, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the ratio determined in the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, it is an advantageous setting value as compared to the case where the setting change is performed and the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the special initial outcome is displayed, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, an interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and motivation can be given to play the game from the early time slot of the operating hours of the game arcade, and the interest can be enhanced.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode A (step 121 IWS 310). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) on the assumption that the setting value is “1” (step 121 IWS 311). ). And it transfers to step 121 IWS314.

  Step 121 IWS 310 to S 311 are executed, so that the feature part 121 IW can not receive the set value command normally, and in the case of the rendering mode A, the set value which is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial appearance is determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), for the setting value “1”, the proportion determined as the odd initial appearance is the lowest, and is not determined as the special initial appearance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying odd initial appearance eyes or special initial appearance eyes despite the disadvantageous set values being set, thereby making the game interesting for the game. To prevent the decline of the

  If it is not the rendering mode A, the CPU 120 for rendering control checks whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode C (step 121 IWS 312). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial outcome determination table for the presentation mode C (step 121IWS 313). And it transfers to step 121 IWS314.

  11-5 (B) is an explanatory view showing an example of an initial appearance determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in the initial appearance determination table for effect mode C, the odd initial appearance is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low and it can not be determined as a special initial appearance.

  Step 121 IWS 312 to S 313 is executed, so that the characteristic feature portion 121 IW sets the disadvantageous setting value in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set. The odd initial appearance and the special initial appearance are displayed to reduce the situation of being discouraged by the player in spite of the fact that the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial number determined in steps 121IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 121IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance even, and the image display 5 Control to display the even-numbered initial output (step 121 IWS 315).

  Step 121 IWS 315 causes the feature part 121 IW to display the even-numbered initial appearances uniformly when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is in effect. By this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying odd initial appearance or special initial appearance despite the setting value being disadvantageous, and to prevent deterioration of interest in the game. I have to.

  Even when the setting value command can not be received normally in the effect mode B, the odd initial appearance symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the determination ratio of the odd initial appearance symbol is set lower than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye design may be determined.

  In this example, even when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is displayed, the even initial appearance is displayed uniformly, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is set, when the setting value command can not be received normally, such as a combination of symbols “???” as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial score. As such, any combination of symbols that do not indicate setting values at all in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  In addition, the process when the setting value command can not be received normally (or when the setting value can not be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined as N in step 121 IWS 308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial appearance. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial appearance. It is also good.

  If the received effect control command is any of the initialization designating command, the command at the time of recovery, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121 IWS 316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 The initial appearance is set to the even initial appearance, and control is performed to display the even initial appearance in the image display 5 (step 121 IWS 317). In the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial appearance is determined to the even initial appearance and is not determined to the odd initial appearance, but the even initial appearance is selected by the lottery. It may be determined to be either the eye or the odd initial appearance. In this case, the ratio determined in accordance with the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormal error notification command (step 121 IWS 318), the effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 121 IWS 319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays characters such as "RAM error abnormality is occurring" on the image display device 5, or outputs sound or error sound indicating RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. And controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the speakers 8L, 8R output the sound of the maximum volume sound or an error sound, or the gaming effect lamp 9 or LED emits light at maximum brightness (for example, in the case of full color LED) Is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (effect control command specifying a change pattern) (step 121 IWS 320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the change pattern command received in the RAM. It stores in the area (step 121 IWS 321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS 322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (whether or not to be a big hit, whether it is a small hit or not, a big hit type, a small hit type, a production control command) (step 121 IWS 323), for production control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121 IWS 324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (a effect control command designating that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed) (step 121 IWS 325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag ( Step 121 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (show control command specifying start of big hit game) (step 121 IWS 327), the CPU for effect control 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 121 IWS 328).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (effect control command specifying end of big hit game) (step 121 IWS 329), the CPU for effect control 120 sets a big hit end designated command reception flag (step 121 IWS 330).

  Whether the received effect control command is a big hit determined whether it is read pre-read in the symbol selection command (see the start winning determination process (see step S101) or whether it will be a small hit, a big hit type, a small hit type judgment result is specified If it is an effect control command to be executed (step 121 IWS 331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM ( Step 121 IWS 332).

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation category command (effect control command specifying the judgment result of the fluctuation category (fluctuation pattern type or fluctuation pattern) pre-read judged in the start winning judgment process (see step S101) (step 121 IWS 333) And effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121 IWS 334).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number addition designation command (step 121 IWS 335), the effect control CPU 120 executes the received first hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning prize command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area where the command is stored (step 121 IWS 336). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS 337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds one to the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area (step 121 IWS 338).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number addition designation command (step 121 IWS 339), the effect control CPU 120 executes the received second hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning combination command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, it is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored (step 121 IWS 340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121 IWS 341). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds one to the value of the second hold storage number stored in the second hold storage number storage area (step 121 IWS 342).

  If the received effect control command is the first pending storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one pending display in the first pending storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The pending indication is shifted one by one to update the first pending storage number indication (step 121 IWS 344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one from the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area (step 121 IWS 345).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The pending indication is shifted one by one to update the second pending storage number indication (step 121 IWS 347). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one from the value of the second hold storage number stored in the second hold storage number storage area (step 121 IWS 348).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command, or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 121 IWS 349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS301.

  In the feature portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial outcome is not displayed, but the odd initial outcome may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined at the odd initial appearance may be different according to the set value (that is, the suggestion of the set value may be performed).

  Also, for example, instead of or in addition to odd initial appearance or even initial appearance, an initial appearance that denies the possibility of being a specific set value (for example, the possibility of being set value 1 is denied, setting A value 2 or a setting value 3 may be determined), an initial appearance number determining that the specific setting value is determined, or the like may be provided, and may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by not determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is negated, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, by setting the value to the specific initial appearance only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, the setting value 3 is determined. . In addition, at the time of initial outcome determination, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined in accordance with the set value may be different.

(Setting indication production)
The main feature part 121IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as a set suggestion effect that suggests the set value, a pre-game suggestion effect to be executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and , During the variation display of the decoration pattern) configuration suggestion by the decision trend of the above-mentioned during the game suggestion effect or the variation pattern described above, it is possible to execute the big hit during the big hit during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) It is done. In the main feature portion 121IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect and the big hit suggestion effect by a plurality of types of effect modes each having different suggestion reliability, for example, a type of setting suggestion effect The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, it may be made to increase the reliability of the suggestion in the order of the pre-game suggestion effect> big-hit suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect or the pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> big-hit suggestion effect. In-game suggestion effect> Big-hit suggestion effect> In order of pre-game suggestion effect, or in a big-hit suggestion effect> In-game suggestion effect> In-game suggestion effect In the order of suggestion reliability may be increased. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be settable. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, a pre-game indication effect or an initial appearance effect suggesting that a setting change has been made), or an execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting regarding the setting suggestion effect is performed by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Pre-reading notice setting process)
In addition, in the main feature portion 121 IW, in addition to the initial appearance effect, the pre-game indication effect, the in-game indication effect, and the big hit indication effect, the pre-reading zone effect or reach indication effect, the presentation stage as an effect capable of suggesting setting values. It is possible to execute an effect by changing the.

  FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart of the prefetch advance notice setting process (step S161). In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a command for one set of start winning is newly received (step 121 IWS 401). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variation category command, and pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or second pending storage number addition designation command) are included in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether it is newly stored. If one set of start winning combination commands has not been received anew, the process ends.

  If one set of start winning winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first starting winning winning opening has newly occurred (step 121 IWS 402). . It should be noted that, specifically, whether or not the start winning at the first start winning opening has occurred is whether or not the newly received pending storage count addition designation command is the first pending storage count addition designation command. It can be confirmed by determining the If the start winning to the first start winning opening has not occurred (that is, if the starting winning to the second start winning opening has occurred), the processing ends.

  If the start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the first number of pending storages is two or more (step 121 IWS 403). If the first pending storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first pending storage number is 1), the process ends.

  In this example, by performing the processing of steps IWS402 and S403, the pre-reading zone effect may be executed only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice or more. Although the case where it shows is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reading zone effect can be configured to be executable, or the pre-reading zone effect is executed even if only one variable display is performed after the start winning. It may be configured as possible.

  If the first number of pending storages is two or more, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the pre-reading zone effect under-execution flag indicating that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed is set (step 121 IWS 404). If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading zone effect is already being executed), the process ends. Step 121 By executing the process of IWS 404, in this example, when the prefetch zone effect is already being executed, the prefetch zone effect is not determined in duplicate.

  If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the pre-reading zone effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area. All symbol designation commands (all symbol designation commands stored in association with the first reserved memory number addition designation command) based on the winning on the start winning opening are extracted (step 121 IWS 405).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is an extracted symbol designating command indicating that the prefetch determination result is a big hit (step 121 IWS 406). If there is a big hit (that is, if there is a big hit in the first pending storage), the effect control CPU 120 is a table for determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading zone effect, the pre-reading zone for the big hit An effect determination table is selected (step 121 IWS 407). If there is nothing to be a big hit (that is, there is nothing to be a big hit in the first reserved memory), the effect control CPU 120 is a table for determining presence or absence of pre-reading zone effect, pre-reading zone for losing An effect determination table is selected (step 121 IWS 408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected prefetch zone effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prefetch zone effect (step 121 IWS 409).

  11-7 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the pre-reading zone effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 11-7 (A) has shown the specific example of the pre-reading zone production | presentation determination table for big hit. Moreover, FIG. 11-7 (B) has shown the specific example of the pre-reading zone production | presentation determination table for release. As shown in FIG. 11-7, in this example, if there is a big hit in the first pending storage, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 70%, and the first pending storage is If there is nothing to be a big hit among them, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 1%.

  In this example, although the case where the execution ratio of the pre-reading zone effect is changed according to whether or not it is a big hit, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading zone effect may be varied according to the presence or the type of the super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading zone effect may be varied according to the presence or absence of the pseudo run and the pseudo run number.

  If it is decided to execute the pre-reading zone effect (Y in step 121 IWS 410), the effect control CPU 120 sets a pre-reading zone effect executing flag (step 121 IWS 411). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the pre-reading zone effect number counter for counting the number of times the pre-reading zone effect is executed (step 121IWS412). In addition, the pre-reading zone effect under-execution flag set in step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and pre-reading zone effect is ended. Further, in this example, when the big hit does not occur even if the variable display of 4 times is executed (when the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter becomes 4), when the variable display is ended It is assumed that the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is reset to, and the pre-reading zone effect is ended.

  By performing the above-described processing, in the feature portion 121IW, the execution of the pre-reading zone effect may be determined when a new start winning combination occurs. Then, when execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined, pre-reading zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when the big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable display, the set value “ It is suggested that it is 1 "-" 3 ".

  In this example, although the case of determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading zone effect based on the pre-reading determination result indicated by the symbol designation command is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the presence or absence of pre-reading zone effect may be determined based on the pre-reading determination result (for example, whether it becomes super reach) indicated by the change category command.

  Further, in this example, when execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined, the case is described where the pre-reading zone effect is started when the first variable display is uniformly started. I can not. For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as start timings of the pre-reading zone effect. In this case, for example, when the execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, it is further determined whether the start timing of the pre-reading zone effect is the first fluctuation, the second fluctuation, or the third fluctuation. The pre-reading zone effect may be started from the determined and determined start timing.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart of an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the CPU for effect control 120 performs control to end the demonstration operation for waiting for the customer (step 121 IWS 502, step 121 IWS 503). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the customer waiting demonstration effect (N in step 121 IWS 506), whether the time measurement result by the time counting means matches the predetermined condition or not It is confirmed (step 121 IWS 507). Step 121 IWS 507 determines that the predetermined condition is met, for example, when the timer (set, for example, for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) is finished out. In addition, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met also when the timer is not set (that is, when the variable display is not executed even once after power on and before the start of the game). That is, when the variable display is not performed and a predetermined period has passed (and not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the start of the game, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is produced by the processing described later. Will be executed.

  If the clocking result by the clocking means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is zero (step 121 IWS 508). That is, in step 121 IWS 508, it is confirmed whether the game has not been started yet.

  If the number of changes after power-on is zero, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Based on the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence or absence of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 121 IWS 510). And it transfers to step 121 IWS515.

  In the present feature portion 121IW, when the customer waiting demo effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect aspect is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white) When the customer waiting demo effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second production mode is controlled and executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third production mode is The decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer demonstration effect including the aspect is executed.

  11-9 is an explanatory view showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 121 IWS510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), the lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of the determination value corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence or absence of the execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 11-9 (A), the determination values are assigned such that the ratio at which the pre-game suggestion effect is performed becomes higher in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3” It is done. Further, the determination values are assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the advantageous setting value is suggested by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by performing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting change is performed when the power is turned on. Moreover, as shown to FIG. 11-9 (A), it may be determined to a 3rd presentation mode, only when it is setting value "3." Therefore, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is "3" by the pre-game suggestion effect being executed by the third effect mode.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121 IWS 511). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. And the presentation mode is determined (step 121 IWS 512). And it transfers to step 121 IWS515.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 511 to S 512, the present characteristic portion 121 IW is the case where the setting value command can not be received normally, and in the case of the effect mode A, the setting value being the most disadvantageous setting. The presence or absence of a pre-game suggestion effect and the presentation mode are determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest with respect to the setting value “1”, and is not determined as the third effect mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is discouraged instead. To prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  If the effect mode A is not in effect, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 513). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the effect before the game and the effect mode by using the pre-game indication effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 514). And it transfers to step 121 IWS515.

  11-9 (B) is an explanatory view showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect in comparison with the setting value “2” or “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and it is not determined to be the third effect mode.

  By performing the processing of step 121 IWS 513 to S 514, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set, the disadvantageous setting value is set. Although the suggestion effect before game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode regardless of the situation, the situation where the player is disappointed rather than being reduced can be reduced, and a decrease in interest for the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect of an aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined in step 121 IWS 510, S512, S514 (step 121 IWS 515). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 121IWS 516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is limited so as not to execute the pre-game indication effect.

  By performing the process of step 121 IWS 513, the feature part 121 IW does not normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode B is in effect, by not executing the pre-game suggestion effect, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game by reducing the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the player is disappointed instead of being set despite the disadvantageous set value.

  Even in the case where the setting value command can not be normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion effects may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIG. 11-9 (A), and the ratio by which it is performed differs according to a setting value only in a specific presentation mode (for example, 2nd presentation mode) among a plurality of presentation modes You may

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, setting is not performed when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) from being determined. The possibility of being the value 1 is negated, and it is determined that the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is established. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that it is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the setting value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the present feature portion 121IW, according to the set value, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect at a different ratio, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (the first production mode, the second production mode and the second 3) The execution ratio of the three rendering modes is different, the execution ratio of the first rendering mode, the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is different depending on the setting value, and only the specific rendering mode is changing according to the setting value It is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the setting change is not performed when the power is turned on, and when the set value command is not received yet, the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed. Not only when the setting change is not performed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect may be determined at different rates depending on when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed, and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined.

  For example, FIG. 11-9 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command for recovery is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), when the recovery command is received, ie, the setting change When not being performed, the ratio at which the pre-game suggestion effect is performed is lower than when the setting change is performed, and the difference in the execution ratio between the setting values is also smaller. By doing this, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is made and when it is not made.

  If the number of changes after the power is turned on is not zero, the CPU 120 performs control for executing a customer waiting demonstration effect of an aspect including execution history information of setting suggestion effects (except for pre-game suggestion effects) (step 121 IWS 516). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  Step 121 When the processing of IWS 516 is executed, for example, an execution history showing the number of times of execution of setting suggestion effects (in-game indication effects or suggestion effects during big hit) and execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) in the image display device 5 A demonstration for waiting for a customer in a mode in which information is displayed is performed. In addition, if processing of step 121IWS516 is performed, customer waiting de-representation will be performed, and if predetermined operation (for example, operation of stick controller 31A or push button 31B) is performed during execution of the said customer waiting de tribute presentation, The execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of times of execution and execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) of setting indication effects (initial appearance effect, pre-game indication effect, in-game indication effect, big hit indication effect etc) are shown Information may be stored, and an effect of inferring a setting value from the information and notifying it may be executable. Note that this effect is to notify the setting expectation degree (or the estimated value to be estimated) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution situation of the setting suggestion effect, and not to notify the actual setting value .

  In the present feature portion 121 IW, the processing before step S 121 IWS 508 to 121 IWS 515 executes the pre-game suggestion effect only before the game is started. In addition, although the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is indicated during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of the step 121 IWS 516, the information on the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, an interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and motivation can be given to play the game from an early time slot of the operating hours of the game arcade, and the interest can be enhanced. . In addition to the example of the main feature portion 121IW, for example, a pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time slot (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real time clock or the like. It is also good. In addition, the execution history information of the setting indication effect may not include information on the in-game indication effect during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature portion 121IW, the number of executions and contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including execution history information is displayed on the image display 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to In addition, when the player captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine using a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. A game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined benefit may be performed according to the game history. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by the player accessing the Web server (or analyzing the two-dimensional code) using the portable terminal, and may be displayed on the display device provided in the portable terminal. In addition, a setting suggestion image suggesting a setting value may be displayed on a display device included in the portable terminal by the player reading a two-dimensional code including execution history information using the portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated on the basis of a predetermined standard from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (which is only estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be

(Variable display start setting process)
11-10 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a fluctuation pattern command from the fluctuation pattern command storage area (step 121IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 121 IWS601 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The symbol) is determined (step 121 IWS 602). That is, by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step 121 IWS 602, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 121 IWS 602, CPU 120 for effect control may determine whether or not a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may decide to stop the decorative symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  In step 121 IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with the same odd symbol as a stop symbol. Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a large hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with the same even symbol as a stop symbol. Do.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, a combination of "135" is determined as a small hit symbol in the case of small hit type A, and a combination of "357" is determined as a small hit symbol in the case of small hit type B, small hit In the case of type C, a combination of "579" is determined as a small hit symbol.

  In addition, when the received display result designating command indicates detachment, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the decorative designs in which the two left and right designs are aligned is determined.

  In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU120 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" or "445" etc.) as temporary stop symbol of pseudo run in step 121 IWS602. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols and the numerical value are associated, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the variable display to be started this time includes super reach (step 121 IWS 603). In addition, it can be specifically determined by confirming the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 121 IWS 601 whether or not it is the fluctuation display including the super reach. If it is a variable display including a super reach, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, and develops while displaying a decorative pattern variation. The type of super reach to be made is determined (step 121 IWS 604).

  11-11 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the super reach type determination table. Among these, FIG. 11A (A) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the setting value is “1”. Further, FIG. 11-11 (B) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the setting value is “2”. Further, FIG. 11-11 (C) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the setting value is “3”.

  In this example, when the super reach is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to develop into four types of super reach from super reach A to D. In the present example, as shown in FIG. 11A, in the case where the setting value is “1”, the rate at which it is determined that the super reach B is to be performed is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), in the case of the setting value “2”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach C is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), in the case of the setting value “3”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach D is the highest.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines an icon pattern to be displayed during super reach according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121 IWS 605). In step 121 IWS 605, CPU 120 for effect control selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to the setting value, performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the selected icon pattern determination table, and executes icon pattern Decide.

  11-12 and 11-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the icon pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 11-12 (A) has shown the specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when it is setting value "1". 11-12 (B) has shown the specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when it is setting value "2". Further, FIG. 11-13 (C) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table to be selected when the setting value is “3”.

  In this example, the panel images A to D corresponding to the super reach A to D overlap the head of the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A at the start timing of the super reach during the variation display of the decorative design. Is displayed. Then, in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the panel images corresponding to the super reach A are erased in order, and the effect of developing to a type of super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top finally Is executed.

  In this example, when it is decided to execute the super reach A, the panel image is not erased even if the push button 31B is operated, and the panel image corresponding to the super reach A is displayed at the top. It does not change from the state. When it is determined that the super reach B is to be executed, the panel image is erased even if the push button 31B is operated when the panel image corresponding to the super reach B is displayed at the top. In addition, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach B remains unchanged at the top. When it is determined that the super reach C is to be executed, when the panel image corresponding to the super reach C is displayed at the top, the panel image is erased even if the push button 31B is operated any more. In addition, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach C remains unchanged at the top.

  Further, in this example, an icon image may be displayed in panel images B to D corresponding to super reach B to D, respectively, and an icon image is displayed on the panel image that was finally displayed at the top. The suggestion during the reach is executed by suggesting the current setting value.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, in this example, there are nine types of icon patterns, icon patterns 1-9. The icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which no icon image is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. Therefore, the decision to the icon pattern 1 means that it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the reach. Further, the icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel images B to C, and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images C to D. The icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B, the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. In addition, the icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images B to C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel images C to D. Also, the icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “★” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), when the setting value is “1”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B is compared. High (in the case of a big hit, a total of 60% of the chances are selected, and in the case of out of a 50% chance of a total). Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of the super reach B is high, so if the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel B displayed at the top finally The probability that the setting value is “1” is high, and the setting value “1” is suggested.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), when the setting value is “2”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C Is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of an outset it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value is “2”, the execution ratio of the super reach C is high, so if the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel C finally displayed at the top The probability that the setting value is “2” is high, and the setting value “2” is suggested.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), in the case of the setting value “3”, the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The selection rate is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, a total of 60% of the probability is selected, and in the case of an outlier, a total of 50% of the probability of selection). Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value is “3”, the execution ratio of the super reach D is high, so if the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel D finally displayed at the top The probability that the setting value is "3" is high, and the setting value "3" is suggested.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected in the case where the setting value is “1”, it is decided that a big hit is made. Therefore, for a combination of a specific setting value and an icon pattern (in this example, a combination of setting value “1” and icon pattern 2), it is possible to enhance the expectation for a big hit. In addition to the mode shown in the present example, for example, when the setting value is “1”, even if it is the case of the detachment, the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate. May be

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), when the setting value is “1” or “2”, the ratio of selecting the icon pattern 9 is extremely as 1%. When the setting value is "3", as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), the proportion at which the icon pattern 9 is selected is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it has a 30% probability) In the case of outliers, it is selected with a probability of 20%). Therefore, in the present example, when the icon image “★” is displayed on all of the panel images B to D in the super reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high. Therefore, for a combination of a specific setting value and an icon pattern (in this example, a combination of setting value “3” and icon pattern 9), the sense of expectation for the setting value of high degree of interest can be enhanced. In addition to the aspect shown in this example, for example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, it may be configured to determine that the setting value is "3".

  In this example, the setting value "3" is used for the combination of the setting value "3" and the icon pattern 9 as an example of the case where the expectation for the setting value differs depending on the combination of a specific setting value and the icon pattern. Although the case where the degree of expectation for the case becomes high is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a combination of a set value “1” and an icon pattern, where the expectation for the set value “1” is high, or a combination of a set value “2” and an icon pattern, where the expectation for the set value “2” is high May be provided.

  Further, in the present example, the icon image is displayed in the super reach to execute the suggestion effect during the reach, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect during the reach in all rotation reach in which all three decorative designs rotate in a state in which all the decorative designs in the left, middle and right align with the same design. Also, in this case, for example, for a combination of a specific setting value and the all-rotation reach, an expectation for the setting value of high degree of interest may be configured to be high.

  Further, the types of icon patterns are not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, as in the icon patterns 2 to 9, the case where icon images are displayed on all three panel images B to D other than the panel image A is shown, but the panel images B to D are not necessarily displayed. The icon image does not need to be displayed at all, and it may be configured such that there is an icon pattern in which the icon image is displayed only in any one or two panel images of panel images B to D.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 120 executes a process for suggesting an effect during game determination processing to determine presence / absence of an effect during game and an effect mode (step 121 IWS 606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is set (step 121 IWS 607). If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 121 IWS 608). In addition, whether it is a case to start the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, it is specified that the first symbol variation specification command (the first special symbol variation display is sent) transmitted at the start of the variation display It can be determined by confirming whether or not the effect control command to be performed has been received. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be started, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter (step 121 IWS 609).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter after addition is 1 (step 121 IWS 610). If the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter is 1 (that is, if performing the first change eye pre-reading zone effect), the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial effect pattern as the pre-reading zone effect pattern (step 121 IWS 611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS616.

  If the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current fluctuation display is a big hit (step 121 IWS 612). In addition, it is possible to determine, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area whether or not the fluctuation display is a big hit. If it is the fluctuation display which becomes the big hit, CPU120 for production control selects as the table in order to decide the pre-reading zone production pattern, the pre-reading zone production frequency pretend zone production pattern decision table according to the value of pre-reading zone production frequency counter 121 IWS 613). In addition, if it is not the fluctuation display which becomes the big hit, CPU120 for production control selects the reading zone preselection zone effect pattern decision table according to the value of prereading zone effect frequency counter as a table for deciding prereading zone effect pattern (Step 121 IWS 614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table, and determines a pre-reading zone effect pattern (step 121 IWS 615).

  11-14 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table. Among them, FIG. 11-14 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot for zone zone pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table for the case where the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 2 (when performing pre-reading zone effect for the second change). ing. 11-14 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 2 (when performing the second change second operation pre-reading zone effect) There is. Further, FIG. 11-14 (C) shows a specific example of the big-hit pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 3 (when performing the third change eye pre-reading zone effect) There is. Further, FIG. 11-14 (D) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 3 (when performing the 3rd change eye pre-reading zone effect) There is. Further, FIG. 11-14 (E) shows a specific example of the jackpot pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table for the big hit when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 4 (when performing 4 th change eye pre-reading zone effect) There is. Further, FIG. 11-14 (F) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 4 (when performing the 4 th change eye pre-reading zone effect) There is.

  As shown in FIG. 11-14, in this example, there are three types of pre-reading zone effect patterns 1 to 3 as pre-reading zone effect patterns. The pre-reading zone effect pattern 1 is a pattern that suggests that the setting value is “1” if the current variation display results in a big hit. Further, the pre-reading zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern that suggests that the setting value is “2” if the current variation display results in a big hit. Further, the pre-reading zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern that suggests that the setting value is “3” if the current variation display results in a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 11-14, in this example, when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 2 (when performing the second changing second pre-reading zone effect), the setting value is “1” and the big hit The preread zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. In addition, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 3 (when performing the third zone prefetch zone effect), the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 has a high value of 80% when it is the set value “2” and a big hit occurs. Select by ratio. In addition, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 4 (when performing the 4th change eye prefetch zone effect), if it is the set value “3” and becomes a big hit, the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is 80% higher Select by ratio. Therefore, in the present example, when the set value "1" is suggested in the second change second look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is made, the accuracy of being the set value "1" is high, and the third change second set in the second zone read When the value "2" is suggested and it is a big hit, the accuracy of the setting value "2" is high when it is a big hit, and when the setting value "3" is suggested in the look-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation, it becomes a big hit The accuracy of setting value “3” is configured to be high.

  The configuration of the pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to use a different pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table depending on whether or not the current change display is a change target of the advance notification zone effect announcement target, or the distribution of determination values is made different. You may In this case, for example, if the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display of the advance target of the pre-reading zone effect, if the current fluctuation display is off, the pre-reading zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the setting value “3” etc. You may be comprised so that the pattern which suggests setting may become easy to be selected.

  Next, if the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern and the execution of the pre-reading zone effect, the in-reach indication effect, and the in-game indication effect are determined, the pre-reading zone effect (eg, pre-reading zone effect pattern) or the reach During the suggestion effect (for example, icon pattern), the process table according to the suggestion effect during game is selected (step 121 IWS 616). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121 IWS 617).

  The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 120 is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, as effect component Control of the various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts is executed (step 121IWS 618).

  In this characteristic portion 121IW, the CPU for effect control 120 controls variable display of the decoration pattern by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 120 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one command (design designation command, variation category command, and pending storage count addition designation command) at the start winning combination stored in the storage area of the start winning combination command storage area, The contents of the start winning combination command storage area are shifted (step 121 IWS 620).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 121 IWS 621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(In-game indication effect determination process)
FIG. 11-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the during-game suggestion effect determination process (step 121 IWS 606). In-game suggestion effect determination processing is executed in the variable display start setting processing (step S171). In the game during the suggestion effect determination process, CPU120 for effect control, during the special period (Y in step 121 IWS701), select the first game during the suggestion effect determination table (step 121 IWS 702), not during the special period In the case (N of step 121 IWS 701), the second game during suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 121 IWS 703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 121IWS 701 whether or not the special period is underway.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the selected in-game indication effect determination table, it is determined whether or not an in-game indication effect is to be executed, and an effect mode in the case of execution (step 121 IWS 705).

  FIG. 11-16 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 11-16 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect in the non-special period It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), in-game suggestion effects are executed in the order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” Judgment values are assigned to increase the rate of With such a configuration, it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set by the suggestion effect during game being executed.

  In addition, with regard to the second effect mode (mini characters A and B appearance), the ratio to be executed in the order of the setting value "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (mini character A appearance) The determination values are assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability for being set to a setting value more advantageous than the first effect mode.

  Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), the in-game indication effect of the second effect mode in which the reliability is high is executed only during the special period. Is configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a special period, and to enhance interest.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the setting value is "3" by the in-game indication effect being executed in the third effect mode.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode A (step 121 IWS 706). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the effect during the in-game indication effect and the effect mode, using the in-game indication effect determination table as the setting value “1” Step 121 IWS 707).

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 706 to S 707, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode A is set. The presence or absence of the execution of the in-game indication effect and the effect mode are determined as being "1". As shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), for the setting value “1”, the ratio itself determined to execute the suggestion effect during game play is low and the ratio determined as the second effect mode Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is discouraged instead. To prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  If the effect mode A is not in effect, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 708). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the in-game indication effect and the effect mode using the in-game indication effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 709).

  FIG. 11-16 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of the during-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the percentage determined to execute the in-game indication effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case that the third effect mode is determined.

  By performing the processing of step 121 IWS 708 to S 709, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set, the disadvantageous setting value is set. Although the suggestion effect during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode regardless of the situation, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged instead and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game indication effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 708, in the present characteristic part 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is performed, the suggestion effect during game is not executed, It is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game by reducing the situation in which the suggestion effect during game is executed and the player is disappointed instead of being set despite the disadvantageous set value.

  Even when the setting value command can not be normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B). The game may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of suggestion effect during game play.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), According to a setting value, only a specific presentation mode (for example, the 2nd presentation mode) among a plurality of production modes is performed. The proportions may be different.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, setting is not performed when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) from being determined. The possibility of being the value 1 is negated, and it is determined that the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is established. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that it is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the setting value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the feature portion 121IW, according to the setting value, it is possible to execute the in-game indication effect at a different ratio, but this is an indication effect in the game according to the setting value (the first effect aspect, the second effect aspect and the second 3) The execution ratio of the three rendering modes is different, the execution ratio of the first rendering mode, the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is different depending on the setting value, and only the specific rendering mode is changing according to the setting value It is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  In addition, although this feature part 121IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, it is not limited to such a configuration. It may be possible to execute the different types of in-game suggestion effects. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, in the main feature portion 121IW, the presence or absence of the in-game indication effect and the effect mode in the case of executing are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period and the setting value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern or the presence or absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo continuous effect, the type of pseudo continuous effect, the display result becomes a big hit Depending on whether or not etc., the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game, the effect mode in the case of execution may be different.

  For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when at least the change pattern includes the reach effect (ie, the change time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). Also, for example, in the variation pattern including Super Reach B and the variation pattern including Super Reach A having a higher degree of expectation than Super Reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of during-game suggestion effects. You may make it so that the degree of reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is performed is high, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is It may be made higher.

  Also, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-series effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-series effect (or the number of pseudo-sequences is smaller than the former), the ratio in which the former performs the suggestion effect during game is It may be higher, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be higher, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is performed is high, and when it is executed The reliability may be increased.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed, During the suggestion effect may be executed to increase the degree of reliability may be increased, during the game may be performed a higher percentage of the effect is performed, and may be increased when the degree of reliability is increased .

(Variable display effect processing)
11-17 is a flowchart showing variable-display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS801) and subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation time timer (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121 IWS 803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121 IWS 804). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step 121IWS 805).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not super reach is being executed (step 121 IWS 806). Note that whether or not super reach is being performed can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 121 IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (step 121IWS 807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in the on state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of times the push button 31B is operated (the number of consecutive hits). The value of the operation number counter is incremented by 1 (step 121IWS 808).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach A (step 121 IWS 809). If it is determined to be super reach A, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS 818. If it has not been determined to be the super reach A (that is, if it is determined to be the super reach B to D), the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 ( Step 121 IWS 810). If the value of the operation number counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 ( Step 121 IWS 811).

  If it is determined to be the super reach B to D by executing the processing of step 121 IWS 809 to S 811, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D overlap on the image display device 5, and then push is performed. The panel image A is erased based on the fact that the button 31B is operated once.

  If the value of the operation number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach B (step 121 IWS 812). If it is determined to be the super reach B, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS 818. If it has not been determined to be Super Reach B (that is, if it is decided to be Super Reach C to D), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the operation number counter is a first predetermined number (for example, 10). Whether or not it is confirmed (step 121 IWS 813). If the value of the operation number counter is equal to the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to delete the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5 (Step 121 IWS 814).

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 812 to S 814, when the super reach C to D is determined, the display is started with the panel images A to D overlapping the image display device 5, and the panel image A is started. Is erased, and the panel image B is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B has been repeatedly operated for the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

  If the value of the operation number counter is not the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be the super reach C (step 121 IWS 815). If it is determined to be the super reach C, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS 818. If it is not the case where it is determined to be the Super Reach C (ie, if it is determined to be the Super Reach D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the operation number counter has become the second predetermined number (for example, 20) It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 121 IWS 816). If the value of the operation number counter is equal to the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to delete the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5 (Step 121 IWS 817).

  When it is determined to be the super reach D by executing the processing of step 121 IWS815 to S817, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D overlap the image display device 5, and the panel image A and the panel After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B has been continuously hit a second predetermined number (for example, 20 times).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the operation effective period during the super reach has ended (step 121IWS 818). Note that whether or not the operation valid period has ended can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 121 IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation effective period has not ended, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS826. If the operation effective period has ended, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (step 121 IWS 819). If the value of the operation number counter is not 1 or more (if the value of the operation number counter is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B is not operated at least once within the operation reach period of the super reach)), it is as it is Step 121: Move to IWS 824.

  If the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the operation effective period during the super reach), the effect control CPU 120 sets the type of the super reach as the super reach type. It is confirmed whether or not reach C is determined (step 121 IWS 820). If it is determined to be the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to forcibly delete the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121 IWS 821). It should be noted that since it is determined that the push button 31B has been operated at least once at step 121IWS 819, at least the panel image A should be erased at this stage.

  If it is not determined that it is the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether it is the case where it is determined that it is the super reach D as the type of super reach (step 121 IWS 822). If it is determined to be the super reach D, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly deletes the panel image B or panel image C if the panel image B or panel image C is still displayed on the image display device 5 Control is performed (step 121 IWS 823). It should be noted that since it is determined that the push button 31B has been operated at least once at step 121IWS 819, at least the panel image A should be erased at this stage.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the super reach D (that is, if it is determined that it is the super reach A or the super reach B), the process proceeds to step 121 IWS 824 as it is.

  In the present example, when the super reach C or the super reach D is determined by executing the processing of step 121 IWS 819 to S 823, the player operates the push button 31 B up to the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. If the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed without being displayed, the panel image C and the panel image D are forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if the super reach C is determined, the panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if the super reach D is determined, the panel image D is forcibly displayed. It is assumed that it is displayed at the top. On the other hand, in the case where it is determined to be the super reach B to D, in the case where the player has not operated the push button 31B even once (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top) ), Does not change the state in which the panel image A is displayed at the top.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to a process table corresponding to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top of the image display device 5 (step 121 IWS 824). For example, when the panel image A is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data according to the super reach A, and when the panel image B is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data according to the super reach B. When the panel image C is displayed at the top, the process is switched to the process data according to the super reach C. When the panel image D is displayed at the top, the process is switched to the process data according to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121 IWS 825).

  Thereafter, the processing of step 121 IWS 805 is executed at the timing of the next timer interrupt according to the process data switched in step 121 IWS 824, whereby the effect of developing into super reach A to D is executed.

  The value of the operation number counter may be configured to be cleared to 0 when, for example, the super reach is ended and the variable display is ended thereafter.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” (step 121IWS827), and ends the variable display effect process.

(Did you decide during the big hit
11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot effect determination process. The jackpot effect determination process is executed in the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114). In the jackpot effect determination process, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, It is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed, and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 121 IWS 902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS 907.

  In step S121 IWS 902, if it is a period until the variable display is performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) from the game start time (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the first shown in FIG. One big hit inside suggestion production decision table is selected, when it is not during specified period, the 2nd big hit inside suggestion production decision table which is shown in figure 11-20 (B) it selects. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed, and the effect mode in the case of execution. In addition, although the "game start time" here refers to the time when the first variable display is started after the power is turned on, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the first change after the end of the last run. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, regardless of whether or not the setting change is performed at the time of power on, the period from the game start time until the fluctuation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is a specific period. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, a period from the game start time until the variable display is performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Also, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (period from the game start time until the variable display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (51st change after the game start) A jackpot suggestion presentation determination table may be used in which the presence or absence of a jackpot suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the presentation mode are different between the display and the period until the 100th variation display is executed.

  In the first and second big hit medium suggestion effect determination tables shown in Figures 11-20 (A) and (B), big hit medium suggestion effects are executed in the order of setting value "1" <"2" <"3" Judgment values are assigned to increase the rate of According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the jackpot suggestion effect is executed to be set to an advantageous set value.

  Moreover, about the 2nd presentation mode and the 3rd presentation mode, the ratio performed in order of setting value "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between setting values in a specific period and a non-specific period Judgment values are assigned such that the difference between That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is performed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a specific period, and to enhance interest. In addition to the configuration of the feature portion 121IW, the jackpot medium suggestion effect (or the specific effect mode thereof) may be performed only during a specific period, and may not be performed during a non-specific period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, it is determined that the setting value is “3” by executing the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.

  In the present feature portion 121IW, when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A1), in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol to be a big hit is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B1), a serif C image (“high setting !?”) 121IW 102 is displayed.

  In addition, when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed by the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A1), after the stop display of the decorative pattern to be a big hit in the image display device 5, a figure As shown in 14-9 (C1), a serif D image ("high setting confirmed") 121IW 105 is displayed.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode A (step 121 IWS 903). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and effect mode of the big hit medium suggestion effect using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table as the setting value “1” ( Step 121 IWS 904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS 907.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 903 to S 904, the present characteristic portion 121 IW is the case where the setting value command can not be received normally, and in the case of the effect mode A, the setting value being the most disadvantageous setting. The presence or absence of the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the presentation mode are determined as being "1". As shown in FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest for the setting value “1”, and the fourth effect mode is determined. If not be. By configuring as such, although the adverse setting value is set, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode, and the player is discouraged instead. To prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  If the effect mode A is not in effect, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 905). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the indicated effect in the large hit and the effect mode using the large hit / inside suggested effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS 907.

  FIG. 11-20 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit inside suggestion production determination table for the rendering mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-20 (C), in the case of the big hit inside suggestion production determination table for the production mode C, the ratio itself to decide to execute the big hit inside suggestion is low, and in the case of the setting value “2” or “3” The ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is lower than that of the second effect mode, and may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

  By performing the processing of step 121 IWS 905 to S 906, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set, the disadvantageous setting value is set. It is possible to reduce a situation in which a big hit during the big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode regardless of being played, causing a player to be discouraged and prevent a decline in interest for the game I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the rendering mode C (that is, when the current rendering mode is the rendering mode B), the CPU 120 for production control moves directly to step 121IWS 907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the jackpot is limited so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 905, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is performed, by not executing the jackpot suggestion effect, In spite of the fact that the disadvantageous set value is set, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed to reduce the situation in which the player is discouraged instead of being discouraged, and it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  Even in the case where the setting value command can not be normally received in the effect mode B, it may be possible to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit during the big hit is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit during the big hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B). It may be configured to determine the presence or the type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), It is performed according to a setting value only in a specific presentation mode (for example, the 3rd presentation mode) among a plurality of presentation modes. The proportions may be different.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit inside suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be carried out at a low rate. May be In this case, the rate of non-execution may be made different according to the set value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), regardless of the setting value, the proportions in which the big hit inside suggestion effect is not executed are configured to be the same, but the proportions not executed in accordance with the setting value are different. You may make it

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit inside suggestive effect is executed as a setting suggestive effect, but in addition to or in place of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, a serif image suggesting a set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied by, for example, that the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect has reached a predetermined number, or that a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is performed.

  In the present feature portion 121 IW, it is possible to execute the big hit during the big hit in different proportions according to the set value, but this is a big hit during the big hit according to the set value (the first production mode, the second production mode, the third The execution ratio of the effect mode and the fourth effect mode is different, the execution ratio of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode is different according to the setting value, the setting value It is a concept including that an execution rate changes only according to a specific presentation mode (for example, the 3rd presentation mode) according to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the execution of the feature effect (step 121 IWS 907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A1), the movable member 121IW 101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the feature effect is executed, control is performed to move the movable member 121IW 101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A1) and (B2), since the movable member 121IW 101 moves to the front of the image display device 5 when the feature effect is executed, the image display device 5 is suggested by the big hit during the big hit It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the speech image is displayed. In the feature portion 121IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the feature effect are executed at different timings in the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 121IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a jackpot. It does not cover the serif image that is displayed by the suggestion effect. However, during the fanfare period, if the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the character effect, the player's attention is directed to the movable member 121IW101, and there is a possibility that the speech image displayed by the suggestion effect during the big hit may be overlooked. Therefore, in the step 121 IWS 907, by using the feature effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed, the feature effect is not performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in interest from making it difficult for the jackpot suggestion effect to be recognized. In addition, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from being hard to recognize even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the feature effect presentation are performed at the same timing.

  In addition, when execution of the big hit during the suggestion production is decided, either execution timing of the big hit during the suggestion production and the feature production is changed (for example, the feature production is done during the fanfare period, the big hit suggestion production during the big hit) In the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming hard to recognize. In addition, when execution of the big hit inside suggestion effect is decided, changing the operation aspect of the movable component 121IW101 (for example, controlling not to stop at the position where it overlaps with the serif image by the big hit inside suggestion effect) or The display position of the speech image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the jackpot middle suggestion effect from being hard to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the feature effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the feature effect. Further, the execution of the feature presentation may be limited only during a specific period. Further, the invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), and even when the big hit inside suggestion effect is executed, the feature effect may be executed at a low rate.

  Next, when the effect control is not performed (N in step 121IWS 908), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of light guide effect (step 121IWS 909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 121IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light, and a light emitter provided so as to allow light to enter from the end face of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a reflecting portion is provided to reflect light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 121IW103 by the light emitter and to emit the light to the front of the gaming machine. Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect that causes light to be emitted from the reflection portion provided in the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided in the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front of the gaming machine, and "big hit" The letter of appears. In addition, while the light guide plate effect is being performed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 121 IWS 909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-20 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different rates according to the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. Ru. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is suggested When the effect is performed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is performed is configured to be low. That is, when a big hit during the big hit in the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is performed, the ratio at which the light guide effect is performed is high, and the big hit during the big hit is configured to be difficult to see There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B4), when a serif A image ("setting is ...") 121 IW 104 is displayed by a big hit during the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of playing the game by the suggestion of the jackpot during the undesirable presentation mode for the player. In addition, when the big hit inside suggestion production of the 2nd production mode, the 3rd production mode and the 4th production mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit inside suggestion production and the light guide plate production is changed (for example, light guide plate The presentation may be performed in the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion may be performed in the ending period).

  Next, an effect aspect of the pre-reading zone effect will be described. FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24 are explanatory diagrams for describing an effect aspect of the pre-reading zone effect. In FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

  As shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), the start winning to the first start winning opening newly occurs during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and four first hold displays are accumulated in the first hold storage display portion 121IW109. It is assumed that the Then, it is assumed that the execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning opening anew.

  Next, when the first variable display is performed after the start winning on the first start winning opening, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the prefetch zone effect based on the first effect pattern is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), a case is shown in which the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the character display 121IW111 of "zone entry!" Is displayed as a line of the character 121IW110. .

  If the first variable display results in a big hit, the pre-reading zone effect is ended as it is, and it does not shift to the following effect screen of FIG. 11-23 (C) (thus, in this case, pre-reading zone Although the presentation is performed, the indication of the set value is not made substantially).

  Next, after the start winning on the first start winning opening, when performing the second variable display, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern (see FIG. 11-14). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), pre-reading zone effect based on pre-reading zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), while the character 121IW110 is displayed in the image display device 5, as a line of the character 121IW110, "If it is now, setting" 1 "? The case where the character display 121IW112 of "is displayed is shown.

  In the case of a big hit in the second variable display, the pre-reading zone effect is ended as it is, and it does not shift to the effect screen of FIG. 11-23 (D). In this case, "If you hit now, set" 1 "? It is suggested that the setting value is “1” based on the occurrence of the jackpot when the character display 121 IW 112 of “is displayed.

  Next, after the start winning on the first start winning opening, when the third variable display is executed, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern (see FIG. 11-14). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), pre-reading zone effect based on pre-reading zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), while the character 121IW110 is displayed in the image display device 5, as a line of the character 121IW110, "If it is now, setting" 2 "? The case where the character display 121IW113 of "is displayed is shown.

  In the case of a big hit in the third variable display, the pre-reading zone effect is ended as it is, and the transition to the effect screen of FIGS. 11-23 (D) does not occur. In this case, "If you hit now, set" 2 "? It is suggested that the setting value "2" is set based on the occurrence of the jackpot when the character display 121IW 113 of "" is displayed.

  Next, after the start winning on the first start winning opening, when performing the fourth variable display, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern (see FIG. 11-14). And as shown to FIG. 11-24 (E), the prefetch zone presentation based on the prefetch zone presentation pattern 3 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (E), while the character 121IW110 is displayed in the image display device 5, as a line of the character 121IW110, "If it is now, setting" 3 "? The case where the character display 121IW114 of "is displayed is shown.

  If the third variation display results in a big hit, the pre-reading zone effect is ended. In this case, "If you hit now, set" 3 "? It is suggested that the setting value “3” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121 IW 114 of “is displayed. Further, in this example, the pre-reading zone effect is ended even when a big hit does not occur in the third variable display (therefore, in this case, so-called pre-reading zone effect of gasse is executed) ).

  Note that FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24 are an example, and for example, even when the second variable display is performed after the start-up winning, the ratio is low in FIG. 11-23 (C). The look-ahead zone effect which suggests setting value "2" or "3" by may be performed (refer FIG. 11-14). Also, for example, even when the third variable display is executed after the start winning, the prefetch zone effect to suggest setting values “1” and “3” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 11-23 (D). (See Figure 11-14). Also, for example, even when the fourth variable display is performed after the start winning, the prefetch zone effect to suggest setting values “1” and “2” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 11-24 (E). (See Figure 11-14).

  Further, in this example, when the first variable display is executed after the start winning, the pre-reading zone effect is executed based on the first effect pattern, and the case of displaying the character display 121 IW 111 of “zone entry!” Is shown. However, even when the first variable display is performed, an effect that suggests setting values “1” to “3” in the same manner as in FIGS. 11-23 (C) to 11-24 (E). May be configured to perform.

  Moreover, in this example, although the case where a setting value is suggested as what a predetermined condition was satisfied was shown based on that a big hit occurred during execution of prefetch zone production, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the setting value may be suggested as a predetermined condition is satisfied by displaying a predetermined character or emitting light from a lamp or an LED during execution of the prefetch zone effect, and various aspects Is considered.

  Further, in this example, the case is described where the prefetch zone effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, the setting value is suggested in the effect to be executed during one variable display. It may be configured as possible. For example, a gauge display or the like in which the indicator moves according to the passage of time is displayed on the image display device 5 during one time of variable display, and at any point in the gauge display the indicator fulfills some fulfillment conditions on presentation For example, the set value may be suggested on the basis of winning or clearing of the battle.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-23 and FIG. 11-24, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays, "if it is now, set" 1 "for each variable display. ? "" If you hit now, set "2"? The case where the present setting value is indicated is indicated by displaying a character display such as "," but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, "If it is right now, set" 1 "? "" If you hit now, set "2"? Even if the character display such as "" is switched in order and displayed, it is configured so that the current setting value is suggested by the content of the character display that is finally displayed when the big hit occurs at the end of the variable display. Good. For example, "If set, set 2?" If the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of “] is displayed, it is suggested that the setting value is“ 2 ”, and if“ I hit now, the setting “3”? When the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of “is displayed, it may be suggested that the setting value is“ 3 ”. In addition, when the character display is sequentially switched and displayed during one change display, for example, the character display may be switched at the timing of occurrence of the advance effect or the timing of development of the reach effect. Good. Further, for example, in the case of the variable display accompanied by the pseudo run, the character display may be switched at the timing of performing the re-variation.

  Next, an effect aspect of the in-reach indication effect will be described. 11-25 and FIG. 11-26 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the presentation aspect of the suggestion effect during the reach. In FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

  As shown in Figure 11-25 (A), when starting the variation display of the decorative design, execute Super Reach D as the type of Super Reach based on the designation of Super Reach in the variation pattern. (Refer to FIGS. 11-11), and the icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (refer to FIGS. 11-12 (A) to (D)).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”), and normal reach occurs. Next, at the start timing of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (C), in the image display device 5, the panel image A121IW115 corresponding to the super reach A as the head and the panel image B121IW116 corresponding to the super reach B. A panel image C121IW117 corresponding to the super reach C and a panel image C121IW118 corresponding to the super reach D are displayed in a state of being sequentially overlapped. Further, based on the fact that the icon pattern 5 has been determined, the icon image “●” 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116, the icon image “▲” 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. The icon image “★” 121IW 121 is displayed.

  Next, when the player operates the push button 31B once, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), the leading panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the beginning. .

  Next, when the player continuously presses the push button 31B and the number of times of continuous hitting reaches the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the leading panel image B121IW116 is erased as shown in FIG. 11-26 (E). The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

  Next, when the player continuously presses the push button 31B, and the number of times of continuous hitting reaches a second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the leading panel image C121 IW 117 is erased as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F). Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of development of super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (G), display is performed such that the panel image D121IW118 left last is enlarged over the entire display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. As shown in 26 (H), the rendering of the aspect developing to the super reach D is executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, the icon image “★” 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118 that is finally displayed at the top, so that the current setting value is It is suggested that the possibility of being "3" is high.

  11-25 and 11-26 show the case where execution of super reach D is determined, but for example, when execution of super reach A is determined, the push button is used. Even when 31B is operated, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. 11-25 (C) does not change while being displayed at the top, and when the super reach development timing is reached, the panel image A121IW115 is displayed on the image display device 5 The display of the aspect which expands to the whole screen is made, and the presentation of the aspect which develops to super reach A is performed. Also, for example, when execution of the super reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIG. Instead, at the development timing of the super reach, display of a mode in which the panel image B 121 IW 116 expands on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is performed, and effects of a mode of developing to the super reach B are performed. Also, for example, when the execution of the super reach C is determined, even when the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C 121 IW 117 shown in FIG. Instead, at the development timing of the super reach, display of a mode in which the panel image C121IW 117 is enlarged over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is performed, and an effect of a mode of developing to the super reach C is executed.

  Also, for example, although execution of the super reach D is determined, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or does not continuously hit the second predetermined number as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F). It is also conceivable that there is no change to the state in which only the panel image D121IW 118 is displayed. In this case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. Develop into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B is not operated even once and the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains unchanged at the top. Developed into Super Reach A without.

  In addition to the mode shown in the present example, for example, even if the push button 31B is not operated even once, it may be configured to be forcibly developed into the super reach D. In addition, even when execution of Super Reach D is determined, if the state does not change to the state where only the panel image 121 IW 118 is displayed, the panel image finally displayed at the top is displayed. May be configured to develop into Super Reach B and Super Reach C.

  In addition, for example, when the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into a super reach having nothing to do with the suggestion of the setting value.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, the icon images 121IW 119 to 121 are displayed and the suggestion effect is executed during the reach, but for example, the icon pattern 1 is determined and the suggestion is indicated during the reach When it is determined that the effect is not performed, only the panel images are displayed in FIGS. 11-25 (C) to 11-26 (G), and the icon image is not displayed.

  In this example, the case where the icon image is not displayed at all when the suggestion effect during the reach is not executed during the super reach is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the suggestion effect during the reach is not performed, an item image having nothing to do with the setting value may be displayed on each panel image, and thus there may be no relation to the suggestion of the setting value. .

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, the panel image is erased one by one in response to the operation of the push button 31B, so that the stage of super reach effect is one by one. Although the case of suggesting the set value in the staging of the rising aspect has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when displaying a meter display that raises the level of the meter stepwise according to the player's operation, an icon image or telop display corresponding to the setting value is displayed to indicate the setting value. It is also good. Further, for example, the reach effect itself such as the super reach does not change stepwise, and only the icon image or telop display corresponding to the setting value changes stepwise according to the player's operation. May be Further, for example, it is not necessary to accompany the operation of the player, and the icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value may be changed stepwise without regard to the operation, and various presentation modes are provided. Conceivable.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25 and FIG. 11-26, the in-reach suggestion effect may be associated with the display result of the variable display. For example, when a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display when the in-reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26 is executed, the set value suggested in the in-reach suggestion effect is determined, Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined to be equal to or higher than the set value suggested by the suggested effect during reach.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (C) to 11-26 (E), icon images are displayed visibly also for panel images other than the panel image displayed at the top. Although the case is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and only the panel image displayed at the top may be configured to be in the state where the icon image is displayed. In this case, for example, in FIG. 11-25 (C), since the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, the panel images B121IW116 to D121IW118 are all displayed with no icon image displayed. When the panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the beginning in FIG. 11-25 (D), then the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. Then, when the panel image B121IW116 is erased and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the beginning in FIG. 11-26 (E), the icon image 121IW120 is displayed in the panel image C121IW117. Then, when the panel image C121IW117 is erased and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed in FIG. 11-26 (F), the icon image 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118. May be

  Also, in this example, for example, although the execution of the super reach D is determined, the player does not continuously hit the push button 31B to the second predetermined number until the panel image D121 IW 118 is displayed. If it has not changed, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. However, when the icon image is displayed only for the panel image displayed at the beginning as described above, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 do not have timing to be displayed at the beginning. Image B121IW116 or panel image C121IW View 17 of icon images may be constructed so as not. In addition, even when the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 is forcibly deleted, the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 is displayed in order only for an extremely short time (for example, 1 second), so that it is extremely short. The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 only for a time (for example, one second).

  In the feature portion 121IW, a character effect and a light guide plate effect are executed in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize a big hit in a big hit, but for example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also performed by the aspect which makes it hard to recognize the big hit inside suggestion production. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the jackpot suggestion (or the pre-game suggestion or the in-game suggestion). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Also, in the case where a predetermined effect (for example, one of a specific effect aspect among fanfare effects) is provided that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit during suggested effects, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it hard to recognize the big hit during indicated effects To give priority to the jackpot suggestion effect. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit during the suggestion, the big hit is displayed by the suggestion during the hit Images may be displayed preferentially. By such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect.

  Further, in the feature portion 121IW, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbol is variably displayed by driving the drum-like movable body having the decorative symbol on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-like movable body having the decorative symbol on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type game machine, at the start of the first change after the setting change, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from that at the normal time (or the feature Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first change after the setting change, the light guide effect to make it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the change may be performed (or the ratio to be performed may be increased). Such a configuration can make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting change has been made.

  In addition, in the feature portion 121IW, the feature effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to be able to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but in place of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, by executing the feature effect and the light guide plate effect, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial outcome effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when a suggestion that is undesirable for the player is made. For example, when even-numbered initial appearances are displayed, or when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the during-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility thereof is reduced. In order to make it possible, it is possible to increase the ratio of performing the character effect rendering in which the movable member operates, and the light guide plate rendering displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. In addition, effects including control to output a predetermined sound, control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and control to emit a decorative light emitting object such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode, not limited to the feature effect and the light guide plate effect By doing this, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or less noticeable).

  Moreover, in addition to the setting indication effect of the main feature portion 121IW, a simultaneous effect to be executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using a measurement timer set at power on or a real time clock) is executed in a specific mode. Setting may be suggested.

  In addition, according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the pending storage becoming 0, or the number of occurrences of the start winning exceeding the upper limit pending storage number, a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting (for example, a predetermined image Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, and the like may be performed.

  In addition, a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting based on detection of an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined The light emission control and the like of the lamp may be performed.

(Render after small hit game)
Next, the effects after the small hit game will be described.

(Small hit end effect processing)
FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the small hitting end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts one from the effect period measurement timer (step 121 IWS 1001). Then, it is checked whether or not the effect period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step 121 IWS 1002). Note that the effect period measurement timer is set based on, for example, confirmation of reception of the small hit end designation command in the small hit middle effect process (see step S174).

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 121 IWS 1002), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121 IWS 1003). In addition, the CPU for effect control 120 is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, as effect component Control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts is executed (step 121IWS 1004).

  Next, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step 121 IWS 1005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step 121 IWS 1005), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121 IWS 1006). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer (step 121 IWS 1007).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect stage determination table according to the small hit type as a table for determining whether to change the effect stage after the small hit game is over and the type of effect stage after the change. (Step 121 IWS 1008). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected effect stage determination table, and determines whether to change the effect stage after the small hitting game is over and determines the type of effect stage after the change (Step 121 IWS 1009).

  FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect stage determination table. Among these, FIG. 12-2 (A) has shown the specific example of the presentation stage determination table selected when it is small hitting classification A. As shown in FIG. 12B shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected in the case of the small hit type B. 12-2 (C) has shown the specific example of the presentation stage determination table selected when it is small hitting classification C. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the effect stage determination table, determination values are allocated to no effect stage change, change to effect stage A, change to effect stage B, and change to effect stage C, respectively. There is. When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of changing to the effect stage A is high. Therefore, in the present example, when the effect stage A is changed after the small hit game is over, it is suggested that the setting value is "1". Further, when the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the setting value is “2”, the ratio of changing to the effect stage B is high. Therefore, in the present example, when the effect stage B is changed after the small hit game is over, it is suggested that the setting value is "2". When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 12B, the effect stage C may be changed only when the setting value is “3”. Accordingly, in the present example, when the effect stage C is changed after the small hit game is over, it is suggested that the setting value is "3".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), in this example, in the case of the small hitting type C, when the setting value is “1”, the rendering stage A is selected at a high rate of 50%. When the setting value is "2", the rendering stage B is selected at a high rate of 60%, and when the setting value is "3", the rendering stage C is selected at a high rate of 50%. There is. Therefore, in the present example, the suggestion of the setting value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C is the highest in reliability. On the other hand, in the present example, in the case of the small hitting type A, the proportion for selecting the rendering stage A is only 30% when the setting value is “1”, and the rendering stage when the setting value is “2”. The proportion for selecting B is only 40%, and for the setting value “3”, the proportion for selecting the rendering stage C is only 30%. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the setting value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the effect stage is not necessarily changed after the small hit game is over, and there is also a case where it is determined without the effect stage change. The ratio determined without effect stage change is different according to which of “3” (in other words, the ratio of changing the effect stage is also different).

  Further, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 12B, a rendering stage C for determining that the setting value is “3” is provided, and a specific rendering stage (in the present example, rendering) is provided according to the setting value. The rate of change to stage C) is different. In addition, for example, even if the setting value is “1” or “2”, it may be configured to be changed to the rendering stage C at a low rate, not limited to such an aspect.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12B, there is shown a case where the presence or absence of change of the presentation stage and the determination ratio of the type of presentation stage after the change are different by lottery processing by the CPU 120 for effect control. Not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the small hitting probability is configured to differ depending on which of the setting values “1” to “3”, the small hitting probability varies depending on the setting value, and as a result, the effect stage is changed Alternatively, the determination ratio of the type of the presentation stage after the change may be made different. Further, for example, the presence / absence of change of the presentation stage for each small hit type and the determination ratio of the type of presentation stage after the change are configured to be the same, and which of the setting values “1” to “3” Accordingly, by determining the small hitting type according to the different ratio according to the ratio, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the change of the presentation stage or the type of the presentation stage after the change may be made different.

  When it is determined to change the rendering stage (Y in step 121IWS1010), the CPU 120 for effect control sets the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the background image according to the rendering stage after the change. Control to change is performed (step 121 IWS1011).

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the rendering stage is changed, a background image according to the new rendering stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small hit occurs. I assume.

  In addition, for example, after changing the rendering stage and ending the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after changing the rendering stage, it returns to the normal rendering stage and returns to the normal background image, for example. It may be configured. Also, for example, the staging stage may be configured to be changeable each time a small hit occurs, or once the staging stage has been changed, even if a small hit occurs, the staging stage is not changed. It may be configured.

  Further, in this example, when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game, the background image corresponding to the effect stage after the change is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, but such an aspect Not limited. For example, it is not necessary to execute over a plurality of variable displays, and perform an effect that suggests a set value only once after the small hit game is over (perform a single effect that suggests a set value) It may be configured.

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 121 IWS 1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 121 IWS 1012), and ends the small hitting end effect processing.

  Next, an effect mode in the case of changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game will be described. FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode in the case of changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game. In FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3, it is assumed that the setting value is "1". As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the small hit of the small hit type B as the stop symbol of the decorative pattern It is assumed that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of "357") is displayed and small hit game is executed. Then, it is decided to change to the rendering stage A which suggests that the setting value is “1”, and as shown in FIG. 12C, according to the rendering stage A in the image display device 5 It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12C, a case is illustrated where the background image according to the effect stage A is changed to an image in which a group of fish 121 IW 106 is swimming in the sea.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-4, it is assumed that the setting value is “3”. As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the variation display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the small hit type C as a stop symbol of the decorative pattern It is assumed that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of "579") is displayed and small hit game is executed. Then, it is decided to change to the rendering stage C which suggests that the setting value is “3”, and as shown in FIG. 12-4 (C), according to the rendering stage C in the image display device 5 It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-4 (C), as the background image according to the effect stage C, the case where the rocket 121 IW 107 is changed to an image flying toward the moon 121 IW 108 in the outer space is shown.

  In addition, the effect mode shown to FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4 is an example, for example, when it becomes small hit classification A, it is small hit in FIGS. 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B). A small hit symbol of type A (for example, a combination of symbols of "135") may be displayed in a definite manner. In addition, for example, when changing to the effect stage B, a background image corresponding to the effect stage B in FIGS. 12-3C and 12-4C (for example, a flock of birds flies in the air) Image) should be changed.

  Also, although the example shown in FIG. 12-3 shows the case where the effect stage A is changed, in this example, the effect stage B is changed at a low rate even if the setting value is “1”. (See Figure 12-2). Further, although the example shown in FIG. 12-4 shows the case where the stage is changed to the rendering stage C, in this example, even if the setting value is “3”, the rendering stage A and the rendering stage are at a low ratio. It may be changed to B (see FIG. 12-2).

  In addition, the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing a production | presentation stage after completion | finish of a small hit game is not restricted to what was shown in FIG. 12-3 and FIG. 12-4. For example, when the small hit game is over, the battle effect is executed, and when the ally character wins the battle, the setting stage is suggested by changing the effect stage and the background image is switched, and the ally character loses the battle. The background image may not be changed either. As such, various presentation modes can be considered.

  Also, in this example, a case has been shown where the setting value is suggested by changing the effect stage after the end of the small hitting game, but a method of indicating the setting value in relation to the small hitting is shown in this example. Not limited. For example, when a small hitting game period is secured to some extent, the setting value may be suggested by causing a predetermined character or the like associated with the setting value to appear during the small hitting game. . Also, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small hit symbols (combination of decorative symbols) are provided, the small hit symbols and the set values are configured to be associated, and any small hit symbols are displayed stopped. May be configured to indicate a set value. Also, for example, when it is configured to be able to shift to a so-called probable latent state after sudden big hit or small hit, the set value can be suggested to be able to be suggested depending on whether the definite latent period after small hit is long or short You may be comprised so that the presentation which suggests a setting value in inside may be performed.

  Moreover, in this example, although the case where a presentation stage is changed on the assumption that predetermined conditions were satisfied triggered by the end of the small hit game, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed, and the rendering stage may be changed as if the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the winning of the lottery. Further, for example, the rendering stage may be changed as if the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of times of execution of the variable display has reached the predetermined number.

(Modification of production after small hit game)
In this feature part 121 IW, although the case where a setting value is suggested by changing the presentation stage after the end of the small hit game and switching to the background image according to the changed presentation stage was shown, it changes after the end of the small hit game The pattern table may be switched, and a set value may be suggested by performing a series of set value indication effects across a plurality of variable displays. Hereinafter, the modification which switches a fluctuation pattern table after the end of a small hitting game is explained.

  In the modification, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ends the small hit game, specifically, in the small hit end process (step S120) in the special symbol process processing, the small A small hit after flag indicating that it is after the end of the hit game shall be set.

  FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the modification. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether the small hit after flag is set or not (step 121 IWS 1101). If the small hit after flag is not set (ie, after the end of the small hit game), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern, whether it is a big hit or not, a small hit or not, a big hit A variation pattern determination table corresponding to the type and small hit type is selected (step 121 IWS 1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  If the small hit after flag is set (that is, after the end of the small hit game), the CPU 103 sets the value of the small hit after number counter to count the number of changes after the small hit game is over. It adds (step 121 IWS1103). In addition, the CPU 103 selects, as a table for determining a variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table for small hitting (step 121 IWS 1104).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small hitting after number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the small hitting after number counter does not reach a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107. If the value of the small hit after counter is a predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the small hit after flag and resets (zero clears) the small hit after counter (step 121 IWS 1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the variation pattern determination table selected in step 121 IWS 1102 and 1104 to determine a variation pattern (step 121 IWS 1107).

  In the modification, the processing of step 121 IWS 1103 to S1107 is executed, and after the small hitting game is over, until the variation display for a predetermined value (for example, the variable display of 3 times) is finished, the small hitting is dedicated only after A variation pattern is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed fluctuation pattern is determined with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern dedicated to small hits.

  In addition to the mode shown in this example, for example, even before the end of the variable display for a predetermined value after the end of the small hit game, if it is a big hit or small hit, it will be for big hit or small It may be configured to determine a change pattern for hit.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121 IWS 1108).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

  FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the modification. In the modification, the process of step 121IWS601 to S602 is the same as the process shown in FIG. Step 121 If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in IWS 602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 121 IWS 601 is a variation pattern dedicated for small hitting (Step 121 IWS 631). If it is a variation pattern for small hits only, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the number-of-plays counter to count the number of effects for the small hits after the small hits suggesting the set value after the small hit game is over. It adds (step 121 IWS 632).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the effect number counter after the addition is 1 (step 121 IWS 633). If the value of the effect frequency counter is not 1 (that is, in the case of performing the second and subsequent variable display after the small hitting game is over), it proceeds to step 121IWS636 as it is. If the value of the effect frequency counter is 1 (ie, if performing the first variable display after the small hitting game is over), the effect control CPU 120 is a small for determining the type of after-small hit suggestion effect The lottery process based on the random number is performed using the hit after suggestion effect determination table, and the type of the after hitting small after hit effect is determined (step 121 IWS 634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 causes the storage area provided in the RAM 122 to store the type of the after-small indication effect suggested (step 121IWS 635).

  FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a small hit after-suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-7, in this example, there are three types of post-small hit suggestion effects 1 to 3 as types of post-small hit suggestion effects. In this example, the small hit post suggestion effect changes the first time, the second time, and the third time over a plurality of variable displays (for example, for a total of 90 seconds of 3 variable displays fixed at 30 seconds after a small hit). It is configured as a series of effects executed in such a manner that the story is developed in order as the display is executed. Among them, after the small hit suggestion effect 1, a series of effects are performed, and the effect that suggests that the set value is finally "1" (for example, battle effect is performed over a plurality of changes, the last third change An effect in which a character reminiscent of the setting value “1” wins in the battle). In addition, after the small hitting suggestion effect 2, a series of effects are executed, the effect which suggests that it is the setting value "2" finally (for example, the battle effect is executed over a plurality of changes, and set in the last 3rd change An effect in which a character reminiscent of a value “2” wins in a battle). In addition, after the small hitting suggestion effect 3, a series of effects are executed, the effect which suggests that it is the setting value "3" finally (for example, the battle effect is executed over a plurality of changes, and set in the last 3rd change An effect in which a character reminiscent of a value “3” wins in a battle).

  As shown in FIG. 12-7, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion in which the small hitting after-sentence rendering 1 is selected is high, and when the setting value is “2”, the small hitting after In the case where the proportion for which the suggestion effect 2 is selected is high, and the setting value is “3”, the proportion for which the post-small hitting suggestion effect 3 is selected is high.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the after-small indication hit effect determined (step 121IWS636). In this case, if it is the first variable display after the small hitting game is over (in the case of Y in step 121 IWS 633), the small hitting after the small hitting determined in step 121 IWS 634 and stored in the RAM 122 in step 121 IWS 635 Select a process table. Also, if it is the second variable display after the small hitting game is over (in the case of N in step 121 IWS 633), the type of the small hitting after suggestion determined in the first variable display after the small hitting game is Since it is a habit stored in the RAM 122, a process table according to the type is selected for the after-small hit suggestion stored in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS617. The processing after step 121IWS 617 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not a variation pattern dedicated for small hit after (N in step 121 IWS 631), the CPU 120 for effect control resets (0 clears) the effect number counter (step 121 IWS 637). And it transfers to step 121 IWS603. The processes after step 121IWS603 are similar to those shown in FIG. 11-10.

  In this example, after the end of the small hit game, the variable display is fixed for 30 seconds over 3 changes, and a series of small hit after suggestion effects are executed in a total of 90 seconds, but the small hit after suggestion effects The number of changes and the period of execution are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small hit game, the variable display may be fixed for 20 seconds over 4 changes, and a series of small hit after suggestion effects may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 121IW has been described with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment, and changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

  For example, although the feature portion 121IW exemplifies a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 121IW003, the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 121 IW 003 a. When the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this way, as shown in FIG. 13 as a modification, the mounting surface of the main board 11 such as IC is pachinko The setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting change switch 121 IW 052 are disposed on the side of the main substrate 11 opposite to the mounting surface.

(Description of means related to the feature portion 121IW)
As described above, the present characterizing portion 121IW (the second embodiment) includes the first invention described below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
Special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state;
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, effect by changing the effect stage) based on being controlled to the special state (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the effect control CPU 120) Equipped with
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution rates according to the set value set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets in step 121 IWS 1009 as shown in FIG. 12-2) Determine the presence or absence of the change of the presentation stage at different rates depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, the control to the special state by the specific effect is described. Can be made to pay attention to, and the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can be controlled to a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit gaming state based on the small hit types A to C),
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a mode that suggests the set value being set (for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the setting value “1” is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A And the setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage C),
Depending on the type of the special state controlled, the reliability of the suggestion of the setting value by the execution of the specific effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The suggestion of the setting value by the rendering stage changed later is the highest in reliability, and the suggestion of the setting value by the presentation stage changed after the small hitting game based on the small hitting type A is the lowest in reliability ing)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific effect execution means is
There are cases where specific effects are performed or not performed depending on the mode of shifting the effect state after ending the special state (for example, when the effect stage is changed or not as shown in FIG. 12) There),
Depending on the set value being set, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the mode in which the effect state is shifted after ending the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the set value “1”) Depending on which one of “3” is selected, there is no change or a change in the effect stage (the ratio determined to change to effect stage A, change to effect stage B, change to effect stage C) differs)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The specific effect execution means changes the ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of effect states after ending the special state according to the set value being set (for example, FIG. As shown in 12-2, the effect may be changed to the rendering stage C only when the setting value is "3".
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the first invention,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) Step in FIG. 12) IWS 1101 to S1107),
And a variable display execution unit (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) that executes variable display in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit.
The variable display pattern determination means switches the variable display pattern determination data after ending the special state to determine the variable display pattern (for example, when the microcomputer 100 for gaming control is Y in step 121 IWS 1101, steps 121 IWS 1103-S 1107 To do),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a mode that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 121 IWS 632 to S 636 when Y is in step 121 IWS 631). Run)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the first invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (eg, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes a second invention described below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
Specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing specific effects (for example, effects by changing the effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a small hit) Step 121) and the part that executes IWS 1008 to S1011);
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution rates according to the set value set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets in step 121 IWS 1009 as shown in FIG. 12-2) Determine the presence or absence of the change of the presentation stage at different rates depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, the specific effect over plural times of variable display is described. Can be performed, so the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
It comprises special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state;
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a mode that suggests the set value being set (for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the setting value “1” is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A And the setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage C),
Depending on the type of the special state controlled, the reliability of the suggestion of the setting value by the execution of the specific effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The suggestion of the setting value by the rendering stage changed later is the highest in reliability, and the suggestion of the setting value by the presentation stage changed after the small hitting game based on the small hitting type A is the lowest in reliability ing)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
It has special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means is
Depending on the mode of transitioning the rendering state after the special state is ended, there may be cases in which the specific effect is performed or in cases where it is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
Depending on the set value being set, the rate at which the specific effect is performed varies depending on the mode in which the effect state is shifted after ending the special state (for example, as shown in 12-2, setting value “1” to Depending on which one of "3" is selected, there is no change in the presentation stage or there is a change (the ratio determined to be changed to the presentation stage A, changed to the presentation stage B, changed to the presentation stage C) differs)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The specific effect execution means changes the ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of effect states after ending the special state according to the set value being set (for example, FIG. As shown in 12-2, the effect may be changed to the rendering stage C only when the setting value is "3".
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
It has special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) Step in FIG. 12) IWS 1101 to S1107),
And a variable display execution unit (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) that executes variable display in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit.
The variable display pattern determination means switches the variable display pattern determination data after ending the special state to determine a variable display pattern (for example, when the microcomputer 100 for gaming control is Y in step 121 IWS 1101, step 121 IWS 1103 Execute S1107),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a mode that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 121 IWS 632 to S 636 when Y is in step 121 IWS 631). Run)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (eg, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes the third invention described below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
And an effect execution unit capable of executing an effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120);
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, pre-reading zone effect) over a predetermined period,
It is possible to execute an effect such that a set value is suggested by establishing a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit) during execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-14, a pre-reading zone effect) If a big hit occurs during execution of the prefetch zone effect by pattern 1, it is suggested that the setting value is “1”, and if a big hit occurs during the execution of prefetch zone effect by the prefetch zone effect pattern 2, the setting value is “2” It is suggested that it is the setting value "3" if a big hit occurs during execution of pre-reading zone effect by pre-reading zone effect pattern 3).
A gaming machine having the above feature is described. According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect executing means can execute the effect so that the suggested set value is different according to which timing in the execution of the specific effect the predetermined condition holds (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-14) If the set value “1” is suggested in the second change eye look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is made, the accuracy being the set value “1” is high, and the set value “2” in the third change eye look-ahead zone effect If it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit, the accuracy of being the setting value “2” is high, and if the setting value “3” is suggested in the look-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation, the setting value “3” Accuracy is high)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
Determining means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step 121 IWS 110 in the game control microcomputer 100);
And a determination unit (for example, a portion that executes step S101 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination unit.
The effect execution means can execute the specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the prefetching based on the symbol designating command in the prefetching advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-6). Determine the execution of zone rendition)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (eg, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes a fourth invention shown below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
Instructed effect execution means (for example, step 121 IWS603 to S605 in the CPU for effect control 120) can be executed that can execute the suggested effect (for example, the in-reach suggested effect) that suggests the set value that has been set. Selecting the corresponding process table and executing step 121 IWS 618, S805);
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in a mode in which the suggested setting value is changed in response to the action detection means detecting the action of the player a plurality of times (for example, for effect control The CPU 120 executes steps 121 IWS 806 to S 817)
A gaming machine having the above feature is described. According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
Reach production execution means capable of executing reach production (for example, super reach) (for example, a part that selects a process table according to super reach in step 121 IWS 616 in the CPU for effect control 120 and executes step 121 IWS 618, S805)
An effect can be executed such that the reach effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (C) to FIG. 11-26 (F), according to the operation of the push button 31B) Panel images are erased one by one),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the setting value suggested at the timing when the reach effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, FIG. 11-25 (C) to FIG. 11-). As shown in Fig. 26 (F), panel images on which icon images 121 IW 119 to 120 suggesting setting values are displayed are erased one by one)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means may or may not execute the indication effect when the effect is performed such that the reach effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, FIGS. 11-12 and 11-). As shown in 13, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 in which an icon image is displayed are selected, and icon pattern 1 where an icon image is not displayed is selected.
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the set value and the reach effect suggested by the suggested effect, the reliability of the reach effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), when the set value is “1”) When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is decided that it is a big hit)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect, the reliability of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 and FIG. 90-27) When the icon image by the icon pattern 9 is displayed in the reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
Information output means (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set Equipped
Suggested effect execution means is
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestion effects (eg, pre-game suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, big hit suggestion effects) (eg, steps in the production control CPU 120) 121 IWS 509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906),
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes a fifth invention shown below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. In JP 2010-200902 A, a change stop command (a set value specification command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and before and after change obtained by the change stop command It is described that display by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect will be executed when the setting value information (setting value specification command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set, there is a possibility that the interest for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, an in-game suggestive effect, a big hit suggestive effect) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggested effect execution means is set to a predetermined set value having a low degree of advantage for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As said thing, the said suggestion effect can be performed (for example, CPU120 for production control, the part which performs step 121IWS512, S707, S904)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, by executing step 121 IWS 031, S 108, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of power on and at the start of fluctuation) Do)
It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, even if the setting value information can not be input properly at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent the decline in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Suggested effect execution means, as a suggested effect, the first suggested effect with a high degree of specification of the set value that has been set (for example, suggested play during the game according to the third effect mode or during the game suggested effect, big hit during the fourth effect mode It is possible to execute the suggested effect) and the second suggested effect (for example, the in-game suggested effect by the first effect mode, the in-game suggested effect, the big hit suggested effect) with a low degree of specification of the set value set. It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination decision table, and a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is Indication effect determining means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121 IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU 120 for production control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the setting value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 Step 121 IWS 510, S 705 and S 902 are executed based on the set value)
If the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data according to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) Executes step 121 IWS 512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect or the like by a different ratio according to the set value being set in a period from when the setting value is changed to when the first variable display is performed). It is described that it may be possible to execute the initial appearance effect etc.). According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is given an interest, and the game is started from the early time slot Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B)).
It is described that it may be so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) may be further provided which can notify information on the executed suggested effect, according to such a configuration. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, when the big hit during the suggested effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is limited. See FIG. 11-20 (D)) It is described that it may be further provided with the above-mentioned configuration. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) It is described that it may be possible to further provide a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. which becomes difficult, and according to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, or the like during a big hit game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the fifth invention,
And a restricting member capable of restricting the operation on the operation unit (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C).
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the frame 121IW003 for game machine is closed) In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted. In this case, the restricted state by the security cover 121 IW 500 A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting changeover switch 121 IW 052 is permitted (FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

Further, a sixth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. In JP 2010-200902 A, a change stop command (a set value specification command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and before and after change obtained by the change stop command It is described that display by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect will be executed when the setting value information (setting value specification command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set, there is a possibility that the interest for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, an in-game suggestive effect, a big hit suggestive effect) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the indication effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of N in step S121, step S708). N, at S905 N, does not execute pre-game suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, big hit suggestion effects)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, by executing step 121 IWS 031, S 108, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of power on and at the start of fluctuation) Do)
It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, even if the setting value information can not be input properly at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent the decline in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
Suggested effect execution means, as a suggested effect, the first suggested effect with a high degree of specification of the set value that has been set (for example, suggested play during the game according to the third effect mode or during the game suggested effect, big hit during the fourth effect mode It is possible to execute the suggested effect) and the second suggested effect (for example, the in-game suggested effect by the first effect mode, the in-game suggested effect, the big hit suggested effect) with a low degree of specification of the set value set. It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect or the like by a different ratio according to the set value being set in a period from when the setting value is changed to when the first variable display is performed). It is described that it may be possible to execute the initial appearance effect etc.). According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is given an interest, and the game is started from the early time slot Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B)).
It is described that it may be so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) may be further provided which can notify information on the executed suggested effect, according to such a configuration. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, when the big hit during the suggested effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is limited. See FIG. 11-20 (D)) It is described that it may be further provided with the above-mentioned configuration. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) It is described that it may be possible to further provide a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. which becomes difficult, and according to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, or the like during a big hit game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
And a restricting member capable of restricting the operation on the operation unit (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C).
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the frame 121IW003 for game machine is closed) In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted. In this case, the restricted state by the security cover 121 IW 500 A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting changeover switch 121 IW 052 is permitted (FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, a seventh invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. In JP 2010-200902 A, a change stop command (a set value specification command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and before and after change obtained by the change stop command It is described that display by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect will be executed when the setting value information (setting value specification command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set, there is a possibility that the interest for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, an in-game suggestive effect, a big hit suggestive effect) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggested effect can be executed as the suggested effect without executing the first suggested effect as the suggested effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, and does not execute the in-game indication effect in the third effect mode, the in-game indication effect, or the big hit indication effect in the fourth effect mode.
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, by executing step 121 IWS 031, S 108, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of power on and at the start of fluctuation) Do)
It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, even if the setting value information can not be input properly at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent the decline in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
Suggested effect execution means, as a suggested effect, the first suggested effect with a high degree of specification of the set value that has been set (for example, suggested play during the game according to the third effect mode or during the game suggested effect, big hit during the fourth effect mode It is possible to execute the suggested effect) and the second suggested effect (for example, the in-game suggested effect by the first effect mode, the in-game suggested effect, the big hit suggested effect) with a low degree of specification of the set value set. It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination decision table, and a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is Indication effect determining means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121 IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU 120 for production control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the setting value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 Step 121 IWS 510, S 705 and S 902 are executed based on the set value)
When the setting value information is not properly input, dedicated determination data (for example, a game indication suggestion determination table for presentation mode C, a suggestion indication determination table during game, a big hit indication suggestion determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table, step 121 IWS 514 , S709, S906)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest to a game can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect or the like by a different ratio according to the set value being set in a period from when the setting value is changed to when the first variable display is performed). It is described that it may be possible to execute the initial appearance effect etc.). According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is given an interest, and the game is started from the early time slot Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B)).
It is described that it may be so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) may be further provided which can notify information on the executed suggested effect, according to such a configuration. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, when the big hit during the suggested effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is limited. See FIG. 11-20 (D)) It is described that it may be further provided with the above-mentioned configuration. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) It is described that it may be possible to further provide a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. which becomes difficult, and according to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the seventh invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, or the like during a big hit game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the seventh invention,
And a restricting member capable of restricting the operation on the operation unit (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C).
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the frame 121IW003 for game machine is closed) In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted. In this case, the restricted state by the security cover 121 IW 500 A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting changeover switch 121 IW 052 is permitted (FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, three types of effect modes A to C can be changed, and when the effect mode A is controlled, the setting value information is not properly input: In the case where the suggestion effect can be executed as being set to a predetermined setting value with a low degree of advantage for the player (configuration of the fifth invention described above) and the effect mode B is controlled, the setting value If the information is not correctly input, the configuration of the suggestion effect is limited (the configuration of the sixth invention described above), and if the effect mode C is controlled, the setting value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the seventh aspect of the present invention). It is not limited. For example, the control method according to any of the fifth to seventh inventions described above may be used to switch the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, and if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggested effect assuming that the player is set to a predetermined set value with low degree of advantage. If the configuration (the configuration of the fifth invention described above) and the gaming state is the time saving state, the configuration of the configuration to limit the execution of the suggested effect when the set value information is not properly input (the configuration of the sixth invention described above If the game state is a definite variation state, and if the set value information is not properly input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as a suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as a suggestion effect ( The above configuration of the seventh invention) may be made.

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effects to be executable by all the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above, and it is possible to configure the suggestion effects by using only one of the control methods. It is also good.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting value command itself can not be received due to a failure such as a drop or data corruption, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control method of the fifth invention to the seventh invention described above. Although the case where the effect is limited is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, although the set value command is received, the suggested effect may be limited when the received set value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, every time the setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means is stored, and then, when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the setting value indicated by the received setting value command does not match the previously stored setting value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions. It may be controlled (restricting the suggested effect).

  Moreover, how to make the game different in each setting value "1"-"3" is not restricted to what was shown by this example. For example, in the case of odd numbered set values such as set value “1” and “3”, there are cases where it is easy to generate a continuous break (a big hit occurs continuously in a definite change state etc.) and a continuous break occurs. When the setting value is “2” or the even number setting value, the setting value is set so that the probability of occurrence of the connection is relatively constant and does not change. It may be configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that it is an odd number. And, in this case, when the set value command can not be received normally, the control method according to the fifth to seventh inventions controls the execution of the suggested effect that suggests that the set value is an odd number. It may be configured to limit (reduce the suggestion effect).

  In addition, the control method of the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fifth invention to the seventh invention can not be normally received is the pre-reading zone effect as the suggestion effect, the in-reach suggestion effect, the presentation stage It is also possible to apply to the effect by the change of.

Further, an eighth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the suggestion of the setting value is performed only during the variable display, and there is a problem that the interest can not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect) according to a different ratio according to the set value set in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is performed. And an initial appearance effect etc. are described. According to this feature, the state of the gaming machine before the start of Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information for effect (for example, a decorative pattern),
The suggestion effect execution means indicates a suggestion effect (for example, in which identification information for effect different according to the set value is displayed in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is performed. It is described that it may be possible to execute the display of the odd initial appearance number), and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering according to the set value set when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 11). As shown in −9 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a specific indication effect (for example, an indication effect during a game, an indication effect during a big hit, etc.) that suggests a set value that has been set after variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, a ninth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motive to play a game can not be effectively given, and the interest can not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect execution means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value being used (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B))
According to this feature, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the fun of playing a game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
And a variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different rates depending on when the setting value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), ( B) see),
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
And a variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns according to different proportions when the set value is set to the first set value and set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, eg, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. It is described that it may be possible to enhance the fun of the game according to such a configuration.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, becoming a big hit in a specific period, that the number of times of execution of reach effect or pseudo-series effect has reached a predetermined number, specific super reach effect In addition, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect (for example, when the big hit occurs within a specific period, it is possible to execute the big hit suggestion effect), based on the fact that the advance effect is executed, etc. Fig. 11-20 ( See A) and (B))
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW also includes a tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm the suggested effects executed in the past, and the interest can not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention of solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.)
According to this feature, the gaming machine is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggested effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggested effect (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S121 IWS 516)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify information related to the suggested effect performed while waiting for a customer whose variable display is not being executed (for example, a part where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S121 IWS 516)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
An information generation unit configured to generate information (for example, execution history information) related to the suggested rendering performed;
An image generation unit configured to generate a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display means (for example, the image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a mode in which the specific image can be picked up by the image pickup device may be provided. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, an eleventh invention shown below is also included in the characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect is hard to be recognized due to other effects, there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further comprises a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is restricted. Fig. 11-20 (Refer to (D))
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggested effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggested effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is performed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) Change to run in period)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
The restriction means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the feature effect is prohibited. See FIG. 11-20 (D). )
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect according to the effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 121IW 101 is operated in the operation mode different from the normal mode Control not to stop at the position where it overlaps with the speech image by the effect))
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The suggested effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display relating to the suggestive effect prior to the display relating to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of interest. Can.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Moreover, a twelfth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest is reduced by the execution of setting suggestion effects which are not preferable to the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A setting suggestion execution unit capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set;
The setting suggestion execution means can execute setting suggestion at a rate that varies according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) The gaming machine has been described which is further provided with a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error indication, etc., which become difficult, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute predetermined notification (for example, feature effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101), according to such a configuration. , Can enhance the rendering effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 121IW103) having translucency capable of transmitting light;
A light emitter provided so as to be capable of receiving light from the end face of the light guide plate;
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident from the end face of the light guide plate to the inside of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front of the gaming machine.
The predetermined informing means is capable of executing predetermined informing (for example, light guide plate effect) for emitting light from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B)) The second setting suggestion that suggests that the player is set to a second setting value that is higher for the player than the first setting value (for example, during a big hit during the third effect mode: FIG. 11-20 ( A) and (B)) can be performed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting indication is executed than at the time when the second setting indication is executed (see, for example, FIG. 11-20 (E)).
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, setting screen is displayed after power on, operation means such as operation means such as push button 31B, switches provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated by the person in charge) to change the settings related to the setting indication effect)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is disposed;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. According to such a configuration, It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, a thirteenth invention shown below is also included in the characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high when the setting of the degree of advantage is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5);
The predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period or interval period during a big hit game, an ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of the specific condition;
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value provided by the game value giving means more than the first set value corresponds to the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) where the proportion occupied increases,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 9-5A and 9B). reference)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that it may be possible to provide a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a big hit suggestion effect) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, which is indicative of a set value being set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Equipped with presentation execution means capable of executing presentation,
The effect executing means is capable of executing common effects (for example, common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value set in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance in accordance with the set value that has been set, and with such a configuration, the irritability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different rates based on the set value set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the characterizing portion 121IW also includes a fourteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high when the setting of the degree of advantage is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourteenth invention of solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5);
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 9-7)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourteenth invention,
It is described that the period in which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be changed according to the set value set, and with such a configuration, the irritability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of the specific condition;
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value provided by the game value giving means more than the first set value corresponds to the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) where the proportion occupied increases,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and with such a configuration, the irritability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourteenth invention,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
And a variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different rates according to the set value being set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fourteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

(Other features)
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the above-described features (feature 1560S, feature 121IW, etc.), but in addition to or instead of this feature, the following other features are provided. The features and the features of the features 71AK to 75K may be provided. Note that, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the characteristic part 72AK described below, the operation control motor 12 for driving the movable member to be the movable figure (movable presentation device) on the effect control board 12 (not shown) And origin sensors AK021 to AK024 (not shown) for detecting the origin position of the movable member are connected. The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor.

(Description of other features related to effect control)
FIG. 14A is a flowchart illustrating an example of effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-mentioned characteristic part. The effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization processing (step AKS011) as the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, the command processing at power on (step Execute AKS012). After executing the command processing at the time of power on, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step AKS013) as in the above embodiment, and if it is off (step AKS013; No), The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly performed and the process waits. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), the effect control process process (Step AKS016) The effect random number updating process (Step AKS017) is sequentially executed.

  FIG. 14-2 is a flowchart of an example of a process performed in step AKS012 as the power-on command process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires, as a reception command, an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 with the start of power supply, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether the received command is a command 9000H which is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If the command is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether the received command is a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If the received command is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether the received command is a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command (step AKS023). If the command is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether the received command is the command 9400H serving as the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS 024; No), the process returns to step AKS 021, and repeatedly executes steps AKS 021 to AKS 024 until the reception command is acquired and waits. If a predetermined error determination time has elapsed without acquiring the reception command, notification that an error of the reception command has occurred may be notified.

  When it is determined in step AKS 023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS 023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS 025). In the game stop state start time process, in response to the game stop state in which the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the progress of effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped. In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for commands other than the setting change end command, the setting is made to invalidate the reception. do it. As a result, for example, various effects associated with the progress of the game may be restricted such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not stopped when the game is stopped corresponding to the setting changed state are not executed. There is a limitation as a range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start process at step AKS025, control to start setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting change notification voice. To control the After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. When the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  If it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. After the control of the setting change notification is finished in this way, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the game stop state end processing, a setting may be made to enable reception of a command from the main board 11 that has been invalidated. As a result, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game can be performed, such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit.

  Thereafter, control to execute initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until the predetermined initialization notification time elapses. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), initialization notification can be performed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation to be the pressing operation of the clear switch 121 IW 050 with the start of the power supply by power on.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), processing at the start of the game stop state is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS 031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the setting is made to invalidate the reception. do it. As a result, for example, various effects associated with the progress of the game may be restricted such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the gaming stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state is not performed are not executed. There is a limitation as a range or limit.

  After executing the game suspension state start process at step AKS031, control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting confirmation notification voice. To control the In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is started, it is determined whether the setting confirmation is ended (step AKS 033). In step AKS033, when the reception command from the main board 11 is the command 9401H as the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is ended. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation is not ended (step AKS 033; No), step AKS 033 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  If it is determined in step AKS 033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS 033; Yes), control to end the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS 034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting confirmation notification screen in the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. Thus, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is ended, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game can be performed, such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit.

  Thereafter, control may be performed to execute a power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the power failure recovery notification voice. Control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), a power failure recovery notification may be made executable. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure, in response to the case where the operation to press the clear switch 121 IW 050 is not detected with the start of power supply by power on. Good.

  FIG. 14C shows the priority of control in the present embodiment regarding notification by display control, screen display, and the like. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state along with the start of the power supply by the power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the gaming stop state to stop the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop state start time process in step AKS025 and step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control is performed so that control relating to a normal effect is not performed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is for the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set as a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable presence / absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by the RTC. The priority AKP03 such as magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, and therefore lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to effect control, so the priority lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen of the power saving function and the like. If the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 or if the setting change notification or the setting confirmation is ended, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position. Even if it does, the display of the setting screen of the power saving function etc. by switching the output amount changeover switch is not started. In this way, the display regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen or the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount of output or output control such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, since the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value.

(Description of a modification of another feature related to effect control)
FIG. 14-4 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control main processing that is executed in a modification in which the setting confirmation processing can be executed during the game. The setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the setting value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after setting of the timer interrupt in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a person in the game arcade or the like, and the switching operation to turn on the setting key 121 IW051 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 121IW029 displays the setting value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting change switch 121IW052 or the clear switch 121IW050 is pressed by the staff of the game arcade or the like, and becomes a display for confirming the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1 There is. When execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the main substrate 11 transmits a setting confirmation start command to the effect control substrate 12 And a command 9400H is sent. When the execution of the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modification, after the effect random number updating process is performed in step AKS017, the on-going setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is performed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 14-5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step AKS01A as the setting confirmation process in progress. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting confirmation in which the set value set is displayed in a checkable manner on the display monitor 121 IW 029 is being confirmed (step AKS 051). In step AKS051, for example, after the control in step AKS058 is performed, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed in a period until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting confirmation is not in progress (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress in the period from the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, In the other period, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  If it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the setting confirmation flag in progress is set to the on state (step AKS054). The ongoing setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No) or after the on-going setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, customer waiting transmitted from main substrate 11 It is determined whether or not a demo specification command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if there is no reception of the customer waiting demo specification command (Step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is ended.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that a customer waiting demo specification command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, if the setting confirmation flag in progress is on (step AKS056; Yes), the setting confirmation flag in progress is cleared to be in the off state (step AKS057), and control to start setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed. Thus, when the setting confirmation start command is received during the progress of the game, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demo specification command.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that setting confirmation is in progress (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the setting value set is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 by executing such an ongoing setting confirmation process, the effect control board 12 side, After receiving the customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value by preventing the effect being performed from being canceled.

  When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game on the side of the main board 11, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command is enabled. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demo specification command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting the setting confirmation start command together with the customer wait demo specification command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during game transmission is transmitted, and the setting value is set after the progress of the game is ended. It may be possible to control the state in which it is possible to confirm

  Alternatively, the set values that have been set are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to perform display corresponding to the set values. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game, the main board 11 does not transmit a setting confirmation start command or the like to the effect control board 12, and a display is provided on which the setting value can be confirmed on the display monitor 121IW029. Control to start may be performed. In this case, in the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game continues.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executable. For example, in the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS028 ends the setting change notification, and the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period is ended. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS 034 ends the setting confirmation notification, and the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period is ended. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen or the output of the setting change notification voice, or instead of a part or all of the game effect lamp 9, a part or all of the light emitting members or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed to cause an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the above to emit light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice, or in place of a part or all, a part of the game effect lamp 9 instead of a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 Alternatively, control may be performed to cause any light emitting member such as all light emitting members or a notification light provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. Thus, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be changed using an arbitrary rendering device or a notification device different from the rendering device. In the setting confirmation notification, notification that the set value can be confirmed may be performed using an arbitrary rendering device or a notification device different from the rendering device. The present invention is not limited to the configuration change notification and the configuration confirmation notification being performed, and one or both of the configuration change notification and the configuration confirmation notification may not be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to a mode in which a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command and a 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command are prepared. A common setting end command is used as a setting change end command and a setting confirmation end command. It may be In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is ended when the setting end command is received, and the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received in step AKS033. Then, it may be determined.

(Description about feature part 71AK)
FIG. 14-6 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic part 71AK of the present embodiment. The output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be provided on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the CPU 120 for effect control is mounted on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in the substrate case accommodating the effect control substrate 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch switching operation for initializing a predetermined effect output and the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when the staff of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, in the output amount switching switch 71AK001, opening the gaming machine frame 3 is a condition that makes it possible to change the initial setting of the effect output. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initializes the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, in accordance with the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, whether the change adjustment of the effect output by the player is permitted or inhibited is switched using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating the setting of such effect output in a predetermined area or the like of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided with a total of 16 channels from "0" to "F", and by turning the knob 71AK002, the channel is switched to the channel. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of six levels depending on whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the volume adjustment by the player is performed. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the CPU for effect control 120 directly or through a predetermined circuit, and the changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the CPU for effect control 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be identified.

  FIG. 14-7 shows initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R is in accordance with "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to “97.0”, and is controlled to allow (allow) volume setting (adjustment) by the player. The output amount of any rendering device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 is not limited to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, as long as the output amount of any rendering device can be initialized according to the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “6” to “F”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited), so effects are output by the effect output initially set. Is executed. Further, in response to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 being "F", the power saving function setting screen can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the presence or absence and type of power saving function (power saving mode) The RTC 126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to adjustment of the effect output is received by the knob 71AK002, based on the detection of the operation to switch the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages based on a switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 14-8 shows an example of execution of setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification for the characteristic part 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A) as the setting change notification, the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic part 71AK, in the same manner as the above embodiment, the command processing at power on is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing. In the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control at step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control at step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS 032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS 034. Furthermore, by the control in step AKS 030, initialization notification is started along with the start of the initialization notification period, and initialization notification is ended along with the end of the initialization notification period. The setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to the mode in which the display area of the effect display device 5 is displayed entirely, and a part of the display area of the effect display device 5 It may be an aspect displayed on.

  The characteristic part 71AK is configured to include the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform initial setting of rendering output such as volume as one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the voice output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. It may be output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 in which a message "setting change in progress" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 in which a message "setting confirmation in progress" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, an initialization notification sound 71AKE03 in which a message of "initialized" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  As described above, according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01, notification is performed with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to adjustment of rendering output. . Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, notification may be performed as the output of the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 with the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of presentation output. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed along with the change and confirmation of the setting value and the initialization (clearing) of the storage content in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 14-9 shows a display example when the player's volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, etc. are performed with respect to the characteristic part 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output is not adjusted by the player yet, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 14-9 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images indicating six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and makes the display color of each memory different according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red) while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white) . At this time, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2" in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, and the first on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increase the display color memory by one. As described above, each time a first operation of tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (such as rightward) is detected, effects are produced in multiple stages until the setting of the effect output reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed so as to increase one step at a time. On the other hand, every time the second operation of tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount is divided into multiple stages until the setting of the effect output reaches the minimum. It may be changed to decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 14-9 (B) shows the power saving function etc. setting screen 71 AKD 12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function, and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, a person in charge at the game arcade detects the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, whether or not there is a power saving function (power saving mode), And, setting (changing) of a value indicating the current date and time by the RTC 126 is executed. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 and the detection of the operation for changing each setting. For example, when "power saving mode A" is set on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only when the customer is waiting for a demonstration where the demonstration screen display is performed. What is to be done is fine. In addition, when “power saving mode B” is set on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is also added during the waiting for customer demonstration and during the execution of the variable display. Any control may be performed as long as control is performed to activate the power saving function, such as reducing (the amount of light emission).

  14-10 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic part 71AK. This effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic part 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step 71AKS011) and a power-on command process (step 71AKS012) as in the above embodiment. The initialization process at step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process at step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power on command process at step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power on procedure at step AKS012 in the above embodiment If it is After executing the power-on command processing at step 71AKS012, the start-time output switching process (step AKS013) is executed unlike the above embodiment. After that, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014), and if it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. To wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), command analysis processing (step 71AKS016), effect control process processing (Step 71 AKS 017) The effect random number updating process (Step 71 AKS 018) is sequentially executed. Furthermore, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 71AK, the in-progress output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 14-11 is a flowchart of an example of the process executed in step 71AKS013 as the start output switching process. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether the specified switch position is “F” (step 71 AKS 032). Then, when the switch position is other than “F” (step 71 AKS 032; No), control of switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the rendering output according to the switch position (step 71 AKS 033). End the switching process. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control to start setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to display the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 on the effect display device 5 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like. After the control for setting the power saving function and the like is started in this manner, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), the corresponding control is performed during setting of the power saving function (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to detection of an operation for tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A, detection of an operation for pressing the push button 31B, etc. As long as the control is done.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control to end the setting of the power saving function is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start output switching process is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control stores power saving function data indicating the presence or absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 14-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS019 as the output change processing in progress. In the in-progress output change process, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the effect output using the output amount switching switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the switching permission condition may be established. When such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switching signal from the output amount switching switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated by the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position identified from the changeover switch signal, and the comparison result does not match. It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether the switch position after the change is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control to start setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same process as steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the start output switching process may be executed. That is, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and if not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the corresponding control is performed during setting of the power saving function (step 71AKS058), step 71AKS057 Return to Thereafter, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control to end the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS058).

  If the switch permission condition is not satisfied at step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), or if the switch position is not changed at step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or control is performed at step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After the change, it is determined based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 whether the player can adjust the volume or the like (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, in the case where the current switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of “0” to “5”, the player can set (adjust) the sound volume setting (adjustment). It may be determined that adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is not possible (prohibited) (step 71 AKS060; No), the on-going output change process is ended. The present invention is not limited to the determination of whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the player can adjust (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a detection of an operation to change the output amount of effect (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, while the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, detection of an operation for changing the effect output amount in multiple stages is performed based on the detection result of the operation for operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It may be determined whether or not there is. When such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the in-progress output change process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the in-progress output change process is ended. In step 71AKS062, when the operation for pressing the push button 31B is detected in the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the volume setting etc. after change is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 You should do it.

(Description of Modification Example of Feature 71AK)
FIGS. 14-13 show control priorities with respect to notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in the modification of the characteristic part 71AK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is controlled to the setting change state along with the start of the power supply by the power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the gaming stop state where the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. On the other hand, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state along with the start of the power supply by the power-on, the game may not be stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start process in the step AKS031 of the power on command process, and if it is in the setting check state, for example, the output amount switch 71AK001 The input of a changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function and the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification has a lower priority than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function and the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification, the setting screen of the power saving function, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71 AKP 12 and the priority AKP 13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, since the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function, etc., when control to start the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the command processing at power on. Even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” before the setting change ends, the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 is not started. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function etc., when control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the command processing at power on. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation ends, power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed when changing the setting value, while the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be performed when confirming the setting value. . Thereby, when preventing a change in the setting value from being disturbed, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect together with the confirmation of the setting value.

  By executing command processing at power on in step 71AKS012 and then executing start output switching processing in step 71AKS013, detection of an operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to a mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, and whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected by the command processing at power on If the operation is detected, information indicating the switch position can be identified is stored, and control of the output amount of the effect is executed based on the stored information after the setting change state ends. It may be For example, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is not ended in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the identification result of the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start output switching process, the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be identified based on the information indicating the identification result of the switch position. Also in this case, when in the setting change state, the control of the output amount of the effect can be restricted not to be executed regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, when in the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a specific switch position, for example, whether the switch position is “F” or not. Instead of the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5, the control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority. In this case, when the setting change notification is finished by the control in step AKS028 of the command processing at the time of power on, the control to display setting change notification screen 71AKD01 which has been given priority on the effect display device 5 is also finished. It is sufficient if the display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 can be started on the display device 5.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting a predetermined operation of the player is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. It is also good. For example, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by a player is provided in addition to or instead of the setting key 121IW051 or the clear switch 121IW050, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value change switch. The setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the same as when the clear switch 121 IW 050 detects an operation.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic part 71AK, after the power-on command processing is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, for example, in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031, a game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control is performed so that control relating to a normal effect is not performed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, and the adjustment output of the rendering output according to the switch position and the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). Thus, when control is made in the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect The execution of control to switch the initial setting of the output amount of is restricted (prohibited). As a result, since control for changing the set value is prioritized over control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the knob 71AK002 accepts an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of effect. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, the initial setting of the output amount of an effect can be switched appropriately. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the effect control main processing of the characteristic part 71AK, after executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012, the start output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the start output switching process at step 71AKS013, at step 71AKS033, control is performed to switch the initial setting of rendering output according to the switch position, or at step 71AKS034 to 71AKS037, control is performed to set a power saving function and the like. Thus, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if there is detection of an operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, the initial setting of the output amount of an effect can be switched appropriately. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 does not matter the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. , The pachinko gaming machine 1 is output at the maximum volume that can be output. As described above, in the case where it is prevented that trouble occurs in the change of the set value by notifying by the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the fraudulent act Can also be prevented. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic part 71AK)
With regard to the above-described characterizing portion 71AK, there is a gaming machine which can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a gaming machine which can change the setting regarding an effect, there exists some which are described, for example in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-29614. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2015-29614 do not consider control when changing the setting of the effect while changing a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage. The Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process process, etc.) capable of proceeding with a game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means capable of being controlled to a change permitting state for permitting change of the setting value by the setting means upon start of power supply;
Detecting means for effect adjustment (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of effect;
Output amount control means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the ongoing output change process at step 71AKS019) which controls the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means. Such as the CPU 120 for effect control to be executed),
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means when in the change permission state (for example, as command processing at power on of step 71AKS012 of step AKS012 And (e.g., a CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing)
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is limited when in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the setting value changing operation.

As a game machine of the means 2 concerning the characteristic part 71AK,
Effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control etc.) which controls execution of the effect according to progress of a game,
And an effect control board (for example, effect control board 12 etc.) provided with the effect control means,
The effect control board further includes receiving means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) for receiving an operation detectable by the effect adjustment detection means,
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 concerning the characteristic part 71AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the change operation of the setting value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 71AK,
When the output adjustment control unit detects the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit before the change permission state ends, the output amount control unit operates the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit after the change permission state ends. Control to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the start output switching process in step 71AKS013, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the setting value changing operation while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a game machine of the means 4 concerning the characteristic part 71AK,
Different from the operation during the game by the player, the detection means capable of detecting the operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine (for example, clear switch 121 IW 050 etc.),
When in the change permission state, the setting value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means (for example, when the clear switch 121IW050 is used instead of the setting change switch 121IW052) ),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value without providing a separate configuration for changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 5 which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK,
It comprises change notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for giving notification regarding the change of the setting value by the setting means, and
The change notification unit performs notification (for example, output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01) with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the setting value from being disturbed while preventing the setting value from being changed due to a wrongdoing.

As a game machine of the means 6 which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002);
The output amount control means
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the setting screen of the power saving function etc. higher than the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification) Priority 71AKP12 etc),
While in the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit is not controlled (for example, priority of setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen etc. 71 AKP11 etc),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect together with the confirmation of the set value, but when the set value is changed, the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled. It can prevent that a trouble arises.

(Description of feature part 72AK)
FIG. 14-14 shows an example of execution of the power-on operation by the movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member to be a first movable effect device and a second movable member to be a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops with the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After moving upward from the retracted position to the upper right and stopping at the advanced position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect is performed to return to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a pivoting mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a sliding mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotation mechanism. The first to third division pieces form a predetermined figure at this time with the united closed state as the origin position. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces can not be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is laterally slid by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member takes the pivoting mechanism and the first to third split pieces as the origin position when the first movable member is at the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5 and the left side of the effect display device 5 It should just be able to slide between the position and the right side position.

  The second movable member stops the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the home position (retracted position). After having descended from the retracted position and stopped at the advanced position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK 014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the display screen central portion of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. As described above, the second movable member performs an effect operation that simply reciprocates up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK 014.

  In the rotation mechanism of the first movable member, the origin position is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. In the slide mechanism of the first movable member, the origin position is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that allows the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the home position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that allows the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state of the home position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that allows the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left position or the right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that allows the second movable member to move between the home position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of effects accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal rendering operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal rendering operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member or the second movable member to the original position.

  When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as indicated by the solid line arrow 72KM01, the pivoting mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the home position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. From the center to the overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen in the effect display device 5. Subsequently, as indicated by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state of the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as indicated by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction After returning to the home position. Then, as indicated by the solid-line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the home position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the home position (retraction position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 and then returned to the home position (retraction position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member can not be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, operations indicated by solid arrows 72 AKM 01 and 72 AKM 07 are required. Further, in the long initial operation, the movement of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member is performed so that the movement amount becomes larger than the operations shown by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved such that the amount of movement is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved to the closed state which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. Thereafter, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01, 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is temporarily turned off after turning off. The motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member may be moved as indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so as to turn off the origin sensor AK024 and then turn it on.

  FIG. 14-15 shows a control pattern used to drive the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a rendering operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a rendering operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first effect performed along with the progress of the game, such as reach effect, for example. The effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second effect different from the first effect performed along with the progress of the game, for example, the advance effect. . In addition, as a control pattern of a movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, and a part of control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive content of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121 and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characterizing portion 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process may be performed at step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the CPU for effect control 120 determines the received command from the main substrate 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005), as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  Unlike the above embodiment, after the control in step 72AKS006, the control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS 007, it is possible to perform control to execute the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when in the setting change state as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control in step 72AKS007, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS010, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), unlike the above embodiment, and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation of the movable member, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, when the setting change state as the change permitted state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation. It is possible not to perform control. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continued and the short initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period ends.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012) and control to subsequently execute the long initial operation (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is finished, the control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 are executed, and when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed to execute the operation. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continued and the short initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period ends. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Thereafter, control is performed to execute initialization notification (step 72AKS014). The control to execute the long initialization operation may be performed after the control to execute the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control may be performed to execute initialization notification before control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS015), and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, control to execute the return operation to return the movable member to the origin position It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continued and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed until the short initial operation period ends.

  Following the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended, as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), control to end the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS 021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ended, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS 021, the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform control to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS 021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is ended, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and control to subsequently execute the long initial operation (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing ends. In step 72AKS023, after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 ends, control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 72AKS 022 and 72AKS 023 are executed to perform the initial operation following the short initial operation, which is the return operation, when the control of the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state. Control can be performed to execute the operation. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS 023 may be continued and the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period is completed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Description of the modification regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 14-17 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed in a variation of the characteristic part 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), and control to execute the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform control to execute initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the memory content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized (cleared) along with the start of the power supply due to power on. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is performed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 can be executed to perform control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation. . In addition, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in step 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, and then the short circuit will be the return operation. Following the initial operation, control can be performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. Control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be a power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), and control to execute the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing ends. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command, the stored content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the stored content at the time of the power failure with the start of power supply by power on. . When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to perform control to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. it can. In addition, even after executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS020, the control at step 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to confirm the setting for confirming the setting value set at the pachinko gaming machine 1 After the state ends, control can be performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery notification command, and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. Control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled as the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled even if the initialization notification is not performed. In addition, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled as the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be controlled even if the power failure recovery notification is not performed. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the return operation condition is satisfied. After the control for executing the effect according to the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. In the effect accompanying the progress of the game, any operation can be performed according to a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily designated according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the setting change state in which the setting value change in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted is controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power, movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member Control to execute the return operation to return to is performed. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the change work of the set value and the like is not hindered by the movable member, the change work of the set value Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed to perform the short initial operation which is the return operation. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is performed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be impeded, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control to execute the long initial operation after completion of the setting change state is performed, and control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is in effect. As described above, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, the long initial operation as the initial operation by the movable member is not performed, and the setting value changing operation is not hindered. It is possible to prevent problems in changing the value. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control to execute the long initial operation is performed in step 72AKS011. Thus, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. As a result, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being disturbed, unnecessary operation of the movable member can be prevented, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic part 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, and the return operation is performed. Following the short initial operation, control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72 AKS 014 is performed to perform control to execute initialization notification. In this way, with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, when the initialization regarding control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by the storage contents in the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the initialization notification When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation as an initial operation following the short initial operation as a return operation. Take control. As a result, in the case of preventing problems in the setting value changing operation, it is possible to share the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control to execute a short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member Control to execute the return operation to return to is performed. Thereafter, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is ended, control to execute the long initial operation is performed in step 72AKS021. Thus, after the setting confirmation state ends, control is performed to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be interrupted, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control is performed to execute the long initial operation after the setting confirmation state ends, and control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is in effect. Thereby, in order to prevent problems in the setting value changing operation, the setting value can be easily confirmed by preventing the long initial operation as the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state. Let's do it. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic part 72AK)
Conventionally, as the above-mentioned characteristic part 72AK, as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. Moreover, as a game machine which returns a movable member to an origin position, there exists some which are described, for example in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154, the case where the change in setting and the operation of the movable member compete with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process process, etc.) capable of proceeding with a game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means capable of being controlled to a change permitting state for permitting change of the setting value by the setting means upon start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
Movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the home position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member And CPU for effect control that executes command processing at power-on of the AKS 012),
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when in the change permitted state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is performed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 2 which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK,
The movable control means is
When not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013);
When in the change permitted state, control to execute the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characterizing portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed by preventing the movable member from executing the initial operation when in the change permission state.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the characterizing portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the useless operation of the movable member and to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 4 concerning the characteristic part 72AK,
Initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and step 72AKS014 for executing the execution control) when initialization of the gaming machine is performed along with the start of power supply Etc),
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014);
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following step 72AKS005 to 72AKS010);
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the characterizing portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, the operation by the movable members can be made common to reduce the control load, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 5 which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002);
The movable control means is
When in the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017);
Control is performed to execute the initial operation after the setting confirmation state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS021),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 72AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the movable member from executing the initial operation when in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value.

(Description of feature portion 73AK)
FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 according to the characterizing portion 73AK of this embodiment. This power-on command process may be performed at step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. Also in the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as that of the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 73AK, the CPU for effect control 120 determines a received command from the main substrate 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) as in the above embodiment (step 73AKS005). Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS 007; No), step 73AKS 007 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed in the setting change state as the change permitted state. .

  If it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes) or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. Then (step 73AKS010), control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends, control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 are performed, and when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial operation becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed. In addition, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state ends. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state ends, the long initial becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed to execute the operation.

  Thereafter, control is performed to execute initialization notification (step 73AKS012). The control to execute the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control to execute the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, after performing control to execute the short initial operation, control to execute initialization notification may be performed, and then control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS013), as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS015). Step 73AKS015 executes the control to execute the return operation to return the movable member to the home position when in the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continued and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed until the short initial operation period ends.

  Following the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is ended (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016; Yes), control to end the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. Step 73AKS019 is executed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation of the movable member, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is finished. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform control to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is ended, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020) and control to subsequently execute the long initial operation (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing ends. In step 73AKS021, after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 ends, control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021 are executed, and when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed to execute the operation. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS 021 may be continued and the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period is completed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the feature portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature portion 72AK.

  FIG. 14-19 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the characteristic part 73AK. In the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message of “setting confirmation in progress” is displayed, and a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of setting values may be accumulated on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing setting value information together with RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the setting values may be stored in the predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory or the like) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, when the setting value information is stored together with the RTC information in the backup area in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 when the setting value history is transmitted, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. The power supply on the side of the effect control board 12 by transmitting from the main substrate 11 to the effect control board 12 a setting value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the setting value. It may be made identifiable with the start of the

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of setting values is grasped It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed to move the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable state Control is performed to execute a short initial operation which is a return operation for returning the member to the home position. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. The staff of the game arcade can easily grasp the history of setting values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When this is the case, control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed in the setting confirmation state, while the long initial as the initial operation. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game arcade can easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of the set value from being difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  In addition, even when controlled to the setting change state, a history of setting values may be displayed. In this case, in the setting change state as the change permission state, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the home position. As described above, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, and the set value is set. The history of can be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 73AKS010. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, control to execute the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is ended. Thus, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not performed, and therefore the change operation of the set value is not disturbed by the return operation. It is possible to prevent the trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is finished, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to perform control to execute a short initial operation as a return operation. As described above, since control is performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the movable state is prevented in order to prevent trouble in the setting value changing operation. An operation to return the member appropriately to the home position is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation which becomes the return operation. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform control to execute initialization notification. In this way, with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, when the initialization regarding control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by the storage contents in the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the initialization notification When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the long initial operation as an initial operation following the short initial operation as a return operation. Take control. As a result, in the case of preventing problems in the setting value changing operation, it is possible to share the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command, control to execute a short initial operation is performed in step 73AKS015. In this manner, when the display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73 AKD 01 which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of setting values is being executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation which is a return operation. Thus, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped in the case of preventing the setting value changing operation from being disturbed. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H as the setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H as the RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H as the power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H as the setting confirmation start command. In this way, when control is made in the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, a command as information different from that in the case of not being controlled in the setting change state is transmitted. Be done. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, the control burden regarding presentation can be reduced. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic portion 73AK)
Conventionally, regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 73AK, as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a game machine which returns a movable member to an origin position, there exists some which are described, for example in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154, the case where the change in setting and the operation of the movable member compete with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process process, etc.) capable of proceeding with a game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means capable of being controlled to a change permitting state for permitting change of the setting value by the setting means upon start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
A movable control unit capable of executing at least control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position (for example, CPU 120 for effect control for executing command processing at the time of power on of step AKS012);
The movable control means is
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010);
When in the change permitted state, control to execute the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009),
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not performed when the change permission state is in effect, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 2 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the characterizing portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to operate the movable member appropriately and prevent troubles in changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
When initialization of the gaming machine is performed along with the start of power supply, initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and step 73AKS012 for executing presentation notification) are executed. Etc),
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012);
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following step 73AKS005 to 73AKS009);
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 73AK characterized in that.
In such a configuration, the operation by the movable members can be made common to reduce the control load, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 4 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
A setting display unit (such as the effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit;
The setting display unit can display a history of setting values set by the setting unit in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01);
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being performed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 73AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being performed, the initial operation by the movable member is prevented from being performed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and trouble occurs in the setting value changing operation. Can be prevented.

As a game machine of the means 5 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
It comprises effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control etc which executes command analysis processing of AKS015 etc) which controls execution of the effect on the basis of the information from the aforementioned game control means,
The game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) different from when not being controlled to the change permission state when being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of power supply. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 73AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by the effect control means and to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

(Description of the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 14-20 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect regarding the characterizing portion 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74 AKP 01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic part 74AK is the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. It includes confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors incorporated in the operating lever (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating a confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00. For example, an initial value of a confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, and second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the wrapper twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors incorporated in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 matches, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matching determination values By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to execute output of confirmation sound and confirmation vibration.

  In addition, while the confirmation effect is being performed, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L ends, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R is started. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is finished, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A is finished and the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect is finished. In the confirmation effect, after power supply is started by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a confirmation effect condition is satisfied by detecting an operation of pressing the push button 31B within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period. Execution is started. Among the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by any of the confirmation vibrations by the vibration motor built in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is performed, the control may be performed so as not to perform another effect. As described above, it is easily understood by the game arcade staff or the like whether or not the effects using the respective rendering devices can be normally executed by the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration being executed at mutually different timings. Can.

  FIGS. 14-21 is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation control main processing performed by CPU120 for production control regarding the characteristic part 74AK. This effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the CPU for effect control 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) as in the above embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), the command analysis process (step 74AKS015), the effect control process process (Step 74AKS016) The effect random number updating process (Step 74AKS017) is sequentially executed. Furthermore, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, after the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS 031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, initialization notification is started by performing control in step AKS 030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS 031 is performed first, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control is performed to start the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with a lapse of a predetermined confirmation reception time, such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of initialization notification is not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether it is a confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). If the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032 or if it is determined that the confirmation acceptance period is in step 74AKS033 (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not variable display is started (step 74 AKS 034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control is performed to cancel the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. As described above, when the variable display is started when the confirmation acceptance period is in progress, the confirmation acceptance period is stopped to limit the confirmation effect condition not to be satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap, and the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the start of variable display is not determined (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation detection for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if the operation is not detected (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set to the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set so that the determination of the timer value is performed (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that motion has been detected and settings for executing the confirmation effect are performed, control may be performed to end the confirmation acceptance period.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that the confirmation acceptance period is not in progress (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether a confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer is started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether or not variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the start of the variable display (step 74AKS041; Yes), the control to cancel the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. The confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the start of variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether a timeout of the confirmation effect process timer has occurred (step 74AKS044). At this time, if timeout has occurred (step 74AKS 044; Yes), control to end the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-out has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value is met (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is ended.

  FIGS. 14-23 are timing charts etc. which show the example of control of a confirmation production regarding the characteristic part 74AK. In FIG. 14-23 (A), when power supply is started by turning on the power, while there is detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050, there is no detection of an operation of switching the setting key 121IW051 to ON. Corresponding to the case where the setting change state is not controlled. In Fig. 14-23 (B), when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is detection of an operation of pressing clear switch 121 IW 050 and detection of an operation of switching setting key 121 IW 051 to ON. Shows a case where control is performed in the setting change state. FIG. 14-23 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  In the case of not being controlled to the setting change state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT01, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. . In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS 021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control in step AKS 030 is performed, and initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of initialization notification is started, and the control of step 74AKS032 starts the confirmation acceptance period. Ru. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT03 in the confirmation detection period, it is determined in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected, and the confirmation effect control process The control to execute the confirmation effect such as step 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 of is started. In this way, when control for executing the confirmation effect is started, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, whereby the confirmation effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is controlled to the setting change state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed due to the determination that the received command is the setting change start command in step AKS023, the control of step AKS026 is performed. The setting change notification is started. At this time, other than when the setting change end command is received, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification or the like is not started. Thereafter, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received at timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, and subsequent to steps AKS028 and AKS029. , And control of step AKS 030 is performed, and initialization notification is started.

  Thus, when initialization notification by control of step AKS 030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in confirmation effect control processing of step 74AKS018 included in effect control main processing of characteristic part 74AK, initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031. It is determined that the start of the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control at step 74AKS 032. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation acceptance period, it is determined in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected, and the confirmation effect control process The control to execute the confirmation effect such as step 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 of is started. In this way, when control for executing the confirmation effect is started, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, whereby the confirmation effect is ended.

  In addition, the effects included in the confirmation effect may be effects using any of the effect devices provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor incorporated in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor incorporated in the push button 31B May be implemented.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the command processing upon power-on is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, for example, in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031, a game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control is performed so that control relating to a normal effect is not performed. In this case, control to execute the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control to execute initialization notification is performed. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later, and the confirmation effect is displayed. Control to be executed. In this way, when the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted is controlled along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control to execute the confirmation effect is not performed. As a result, since control for changing the setting value is prioritized over control for executing the confirmation effect, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed according to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, after the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Do. As a result, in the case of preventing a problem in changing the setting value, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed to become a confirmation acceptance period, and thereafter it is determined that the start operation is detected in step 74AKS036, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . As a result, in the case of preventing a problem in changing the setting value, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  When the confirmation effect control process is executed at step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control at step 74AKS032 is executed, whereby the memory contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. If the setting confirmation state is completed, the confirmation acceptance period is the same as when the setting confirmation state is ended. Control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, control about execution of confirmation production can be made common, and the control burden of confirmation production can be reduced. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic part 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 to enable control to output a confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes the output of the sound for confirmation by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means. As a result, in the case of preventing a problem in changing the setting value, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic portion 74AK)
Conventionally, as the above-mentioned characteristic part 74AK, as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2016-220833 A, consideration is not given to the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation are in competition. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent a problem in changing the setting value.
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process process, etc.) capable of proceeding with a game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means capable of being controlled to a change permitting state for permitting change of the setting value by the setting means upon start of power supply;
Effect means capable of executing effects (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.);
Confirmation control means capable of executing control of confirmation effect by the effect means on the basis of satisfaction of the confirmation effect condition after power supply is started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) Equipped with
The confirmation control means
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition when not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply (for example, step AKS021, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of AKS030, etc. ),
When the change permission state is set, the control to execute the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029),
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 2 concerning the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS025 to AKS030, etc. ),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the characterizing portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 74AK,
A game detection means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player is provided.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the detection means for gaming when it is a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036, etc.)
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characterizing part 74AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

As a game machine of the means 4 which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK,
When the confirmation control means is initialized without being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of the power supply, the confirmation effect condition of the confirmation effect condition in the common confirmation acceptance period when the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characterizing part 74AK.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect can be made common, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 5 which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK,
And sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting an effect sound,
The confirmation effect includes the output of a sound for confirmation by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characterizing part 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

(Description of the feature portion 75AK)
FIG. 14-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characterizing portion 75AK of this embodiment. The power-on command process may be performed at step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature portion 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 75AK, the CPU for effect control 120 determines a received command from the main substrate 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed as in the above embodiment (step 75AKS005) to change the setting. Control to start notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). When the setting change is not finished (step 75AKS 007; No), unlike the above embodiment, after the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), the process returns to step 75AKS 007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, by executing the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008, the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply. When it happens, control for performing confirmation production can be performed. If it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

  If it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes) or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. Then (step 75AKS011), the power-on command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), End the power on command processing. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of the power supply, the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of step 75AKS008 is executed while the setting confirmation state is set. When it is controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during setting change is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect is performed in the setting change state, the control for enabling the confirmation effect is not performed in the setting confirmation state.

  FIG. 14-25 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step 75AKS008 as confirmation effect control processing during setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a confirmation effect has been made (step 75AKS 031). In step 75AKS 031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been made. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been made in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the process of confirming effect during the setting change ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been made (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether a confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). If there is no motion detection at step 75AKS 033 (step 75AKS 033; No), the setting change confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that motion has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read out (step 75AKS034) as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect process timer is initial A value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and a first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). As described above, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, the determination of step 75AKS 033 is performed. Therefore, in the setting change state as the change permission state, any setting period is not provided such as the confirmation reception period. By detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B at the timing or the like, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038) ). At this time, if timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control to end the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-out has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is met (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is ended.

  FIGS. 14-26 are timing diagrams etc. which show the example of control of a confirmation production regarding the characteristic part 75AK. In FIG. 14-26 (A), when power supply is started by turning on the power, while there is detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050, there is no detection of an operation of switching the setting key 121IW051 to ON. Corresponding to the case where the setting change state is not controlled. In Fig. 14-26 (B), when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is detection of an operation of pressing clear switch 121 IW 050 and detection of an operation of switching setting key 121 IW 051 to ON. Shows a case where control is performed in the setting change state. FIG. 14-26 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When not controlled to the setting change state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case where the setting change state is not controlled by the characteristic part 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. Thus, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at timing 75AKT03 in the confirmation acceptance period, the control to execute the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. A plurality of types of effects, which become first to third confirmation effects, are sequentially executed using. After that, when the timing 75AKT04 comes, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when control is performed in the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 75AKT11, unlike in the case where control is performed in the setting change state by the characteristic part 74AK, the setting change is Since the start command has been received, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is the setting change start command. Thus, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is ended in step 75AKS007. If not ended at this time, the confirmation effect control process during setting change is executed in step 75AKS008. Ru. In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic part 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start operation has been detected. Thus, in the setting change state as the change permitted state, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting an operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. The control to execute the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is started. Thus, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be performed as the first to third confirmation effects are executed in order. Thereafter, when the timing 75AKT14 comes, the confirmation effect ends.

  After the timing 75AKT14 is reached, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in the step 75AKS007 that the setting change is ended. Thus, following the steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of the step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, as in the case of the characteristic part 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. Just do it. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in the confirmation reception period, the control to execute the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the detection of the start operation is performed in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition, and control to execute the confirmation effect is performed. In this way, when control is made in the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, control to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state as the change permission state is, by making the confirmation effect executable, the operation of accurately confirming the state of the gaming machine and confirming the state of the gaming machine may occur. It can prevent.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the characteristic portion 74AK is executed, whereby the confirmation acceptance is received. The period starts. During this confirmation reception period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, when it is determined in step 75AKS 033 that the start operation has been detected without providing a confirmation acceptance period, control to execute the confirmation effect is performed. As a result, when the setting change state as the change permission condition is in, the confirmation effect can be executed any time. Therefore, in order to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect can be performed together with the change of the setting value. It can run properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed according to the setting change state. Thereafter, the confirmation reception control process similar to that of the characteristic part 74AK is executed, whereby the confirmation acceptance period is started. In this way, since the control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period is performed after the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, trouble occurs in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine In the case of preventing the problem, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS 033, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Further, by performing the same confirmation effect control processing as that of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. As a result, in the case of preventing any trouble in the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

(Description of means related to the feature portion 75AK)
Conventionally, as the above-mentioned characteristic part 75AK, as a game machine which can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2016-220833 A, consideration is not given to the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation are in competition. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing trouble in the confirmation operation of the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process process, etc.) capable of proceeding with a game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means capable of being controlled to a change permitting state for permitting change of the setting value by the setting means upon start of power supply;
Effect means capable of executing effects (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.);
Confirmation control means (for example, confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, change of setting of step 75AKS008 during confirmation effect control) capable of executing control of confirmation effect by the effect means after power supply is started. And an effect control CPU 120) that executes processing
The confirmation control means
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period when the change permission state is not controlled with the start of the power supply (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc. ),
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition when in the change permission state (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008, etc.)
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be performed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine properly and confirming the state of the gaming machine. .

As a game machine of the means 2 which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033 , 74AKS036, etc.),
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation acceptance period when in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 75AKS 033).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the characterizing portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with the change of the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period after the change permission state ends (for example, steps after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 Such as running 74 AKS 018),
The gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characterizing portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a game machine of the means 4 which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK,
The game detection means (for example, the push button 31B, the push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the action by the player is provided.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 75AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

(Description of means common to features 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of means A related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detection means (for example, setting key 121IW051 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Detection means for initialization (for example, clear switch 121IW050 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of the gaming machine;
A setting confirmation control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection unit with the start of the power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002);
A change permission control means capable of controlling the change permission state based on detection of an operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply;
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting values by appropriately controlling the setting confirmation state and the change permission state.

As a game machine of the means B which concerns on the characteristic parts 71AK-75AK,
Setting detection means (for example, setting key 121IW051 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
An initialization detection unit capable of detecting an operation related to initialization (for example, clear switch 121 IW 050);
When the operation is not detected by the setting detection unit with the start of the power supply and the operation is detected by the initialization detection unit, the initialization notification is performed with the start of the power supply, while the start of the power supply is started. Initialization notification unit that executes initialization notification after the operation is not detected when the operation is detected by the setting detection unit along with (for effect control for executing the command processing at power on in step AKS012, for example) And the like)
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the initialization notification can be appropriately performed to enable the appropriate setting of the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means C pertaining to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
The information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029 etc.) which can display the information regarding the game value given based on a game medium entering into a predetermined field,
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A, etc.)
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, appropriate setting of setting values is possible without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting values.

As a game machine of the means D which concerns on the characteristic parts 71AK-75AK,
Detection means for effect (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of effect;
The display control means (for example, CPU 120 for presentation control etc which performs step AKS026 etc.) which displays the display about the setting value by the above-mentioned setting means with priority over the display about the output amount of a production,
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value.

As a game machine of the means E which concerns on the characteristic parts 71AK-75AK,
Effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control which executes command analysis processing of AKS 015 etc.) which controls execution of effects based on information from the game control means, and
The effect control means, when in the change permitted state, restricts control based on information different from notification information for notifying the end of the change permitted state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executing AKS 027, etc. ) And
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, occurrence of a failure can be prevented, and appropriate setting of setting values can be performed.

(Other configuration)
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with the above-described features. However, in addition to or instead of the features, the following configuration may be provided.

(Game slot, door open sensor, and information output circuit)
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates (not shown) such as a payout control substrate and an information terminal substrate are arranged. Further, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is provided a discharge opening for discharging the game balls entering the winning openings and the gaming balls entering the out opening, and in the discharge opening, the pachinko gaming machine An outlet switch 21TM 070 (not shown) is provided to detect gaming balls discharged from the inside of the unit 1. On the payout control board, a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 and a door for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the front of the game board 2 openably and closably A game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 (not shown) including a frame open sensor is connected, and the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) is determined based on detection signals output from these sensors It also has features. The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the micro The computer can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a. Further, an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals is mounted on the information terminal board. The information output circuit 112 may be mounted on the main substrate 11.

(Signal for changing setting)
Next, various signals output from the information output circuit 112 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 15A, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Be done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-like signal that is output each time ten prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM 300, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will also be on when it is

  From the third terminal, an all symbol determination number signal is output. The total symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived (displayed), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the display result is derived It is a pulse-like signal output when displayed (when confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. The fourth terminal outputs an all start port signal. The all starting opening signal is a pulse-like signal which is output when a game ball winning a first starting winning opening occurs, and is also output when a game ball winning a second starting winning opening occurs. The pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  A jackpot 1 signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Two jacks are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is ON when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is also ON when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be identified as the high base state.

  The seventh terminal outputs a setting change corresponding signal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on in a period controlled in the setting change mode and turned on also in a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the external apparatus side specifies the set value by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal which is output each time 10 out balls (the game balls shot into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM 070, and the pulse width is 0 It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal corresponds to each winning opening (each winning opening) (a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, a first general winning opening to a fourth general winning opening). It is a pulse-like signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time ten winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process is performed when the power is turned on. In addition, when cheating is detected, it will be in the ON state for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, the case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is given to each winning opening (for example, the game ball is given 15 or more times per 30 seconds to the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball is winning in the case of winning), etc., it is determined to be an abnormal winning. In addition, it also includes when switch abnormality detection occurs, the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process 10 consecutive times or more (1) It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on the fact that the start port switch is in the ON state). Also, when the abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the on state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, and the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on ( It becomes ON state for 4 minutes after error cancellation).

  Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), the security signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and is in the ON state also in the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  Thus, the security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and the setting change response signal can be output from the 7th terminal, so that the possibility of fraudulent activity can be notified to the outside, It is possible to externally notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that the process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current setting value being output is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (1), when transitioning to the setting change mode at the time of power on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal A security signal is output. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (2), when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power on, the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, the security signal from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power-on, the setting change corresponding signal is output along with the end of the setting confirmation mode as in the example shown in FIG. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the switch is turned off.

  If the RAM clear is executed without transitioning to either the setting change mode or the setting check mode at power on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal Is not turned on.

  Thus, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to recognize that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

  The setting change response signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, but regarding the security signal, the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even when the result of the check is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it can be recognized that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may be executed without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, such as management of a hall computer etc. If the apparatus can recognize and if the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize temporarily that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input can be performed. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to distinguish and recognize the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 15-2 (3), the configuration may be such that the security signal is not output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. In this configuration, a security signal is output during a period controlled in the setting change mode while a security signal is not output during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. No output of the security signal, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is included. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the OFF state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not performed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (5), the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting confirmation mode at power on. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the end of the setting confirmation mode (the OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (4), the configuration may be such that the security signal is not output during the period controlled in the setting change mode. That is, when transitioning to the setting change mode at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode at power on. Although the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this manner, while the setting change corresponding signal is in the ON state while the security signal is in the OFF state while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By setting the security signal to the ON state for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned to the OFF state), when one signal is in the ON state, the other signal is in the OFF state. Relationship. Such a relationship simplifies signal output control (both output signals are simplified because both signals are not in the ON state), and the external device clearly indicates the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300, the game is started from the second terminal The machine frame and door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the completion of the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame and door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal, but usually the output terminal Because there is a restriction in the assignment of, it may be difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change compatible signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 15-1 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the assignment of signals in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process is performed when the power is turned on. In addition, when cheating is detected, it will be in the ON state for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, the case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is given to each winning opening (for example, the game ball is given 15 or more times per 30 seconds to the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball is winning in the case of winning), etc., it is determined to be an abnormal winning. In addition, it also includes when switch abnormality detection occurs, the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process 10 consecutive times or more (1) It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on the fact that the start port switch is in the ON state). Also, when the abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the on state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, and the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on ( It becomes ON state for 4 minutes after error cancellation).

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 15-1 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on in a period controlled in the setting change mode and turned on also in a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the external apparatus side specifies the set value by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

  Thus, by being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that fraudulent acts have been made to the outside, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. It is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that the process related to the setting change may have been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting check mode is After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the 10th terminal becomes the OFF state), and thereafter from the same 10th terminal, a number of pulse shapes corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the set value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change response signal is transmitted to the management device together with the gaming machine number (base number) through the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the base number and the setting change response signal in the management device By correlating and displaying the predetermined value and the setting value determined in advance, it is possible to perform processing such as to display in a contrastable manner. As a result, the manager of the game arcade can easily manage the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines through the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the setting changed in the setting change operation are made The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. Then, when such a mismatch occurs, it is possible to optimize the management regarding the settings in the plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade by performing the setting confirmation or the setting changing operation again for the gaming machine. it can.

  As described above, the setting change response signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 It is output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15C, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulse as the number of set values is output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second, and for example, when the set value is 3, a pulse with a width of 0.1 second is output three times at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 second). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 15-4 (1), in response to the control in the setting change mode at power-on, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is one. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is ended without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, but based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1, the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode is A pulse of 1 is being output.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed It is possible to notify the setting value after change to the outside, and output a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled or not and a signal notifying the setting value from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, a number of pulses corresponding to the setting value is output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined predetermined timing. Ru. Specifically, events related to the gaming state such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, that the big hit gaming state has ended, that the high base state has ended, that the number of prize balls paid out has increased by 1000 Or, when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected, that the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, that the magnetic abnormality is detected, etc. And outputs a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102). In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (1), a pulse of 1 is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode, triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine in the external device, for example, the external device because the setting change response signal is not properly input when the setting change mode is ended. Even if the setting value can not be specified on the side, it is possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined timing thereafter, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraudulently changing the setting value by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON in response to the control in the setting change mode at the time of power on. Here, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is one. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of changing the setting value. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and the setting change is supported based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becoming 3. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (2), three pulses are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode, triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (1), when the setting value change operation is not performed (the setting change switch operation) to change the setting value is not performed and the setting value is not changed. As shown in Fig. 15-3 (2), when the setting change mode is being controlled, the setting value is changed (the setting change switch is operated) and the setting value is changed. In any case, after completion of the setting change mode, pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is performed along with the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value change is actually performed. , Signal output processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON in response to the control in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power on. Here, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is one. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is left unchanged at 1. In this case, upon completion of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, and the setting change corresponding signal is 1 based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being one. A pulse of 1 is being output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (3), a pulse of 1 is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode, triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (setting value storage of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on) The setting value stored in the area, which has been displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting value Can be output from the common information output terminal.

  In addition, in the assignment pattern 2 of the information terminal shown in FIG. 15-1 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed along with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it becomes an OFF state, and thereafter from the same 10th terminal, a number of pulse shapes corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode The setting change corresponding signal of) is output.

(Process at power on)
FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams showing an example of the process executed by the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is a process corresponding to the gaming control main process. However, illustration is omitted about a part of process already demonstrated among these processes.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010). Specifically, a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether the setting change in progress flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change in progress flag is set when setting change / confirmation processing to be described later is performed (step S21TM3510), and cleared when the setting key 121IW051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change in progress flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a normal value, for example, any of 1 to 3 It is checked whether or not it is (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from a gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), a value (for example, 0) different from the above-mentioned legitimate value is stored in the set value storage area May be In addition, when the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether the clear switch 121IW 050 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If the clear switch 121IW 050 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area, and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area where each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029) such as reciprocity ratio, combination ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each total for each set value The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized. In addition, the notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command for designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 reports that initialization of the game state or the like has been performed in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch 121IW 050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command in recovery) as a command in power supply recovery (step S21TM3045), and shifts to step S21TM3060 . Based on the reception of the backup command (the command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time of the power supply stop. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. Can be reported.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening is performed. From the sensor 21TM300, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected are output to the microcomputer of the payout control board. When the microcomputer of the payout control board recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the microcomputer 100 for game control that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized individually.

  A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 to the gaming control microcomputer 100, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. When the detection signal indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 is configured to output a detection signal (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized individually.

  If the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), the CPU 103 confirms whether the setting key 121IW051 is ON (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process shifts to processing in step S21TM 3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the setting value can be confirmed and changed, and when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the setting value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), power is not interrupted during setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step Change in the setting value and / or on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3030) (YES in step S21TM3060) and the setting key 121IW051 is on (YES in step S21TM3070) It becomes possible to confirm and shift to the normal game processing on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070) .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state; 2) Two conditions are required: the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state. The state where the CPU 103 can confirm the set value when it is confirmed that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination process of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 (setting confirmation (setting confirmation) Mode) can be transferred. In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) as described later, on condition that the clear switch 121 IW 050 is determined to be ON (YES) in step S21TM3040, as will be described later. It is possible to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2 and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can not Temporarily, even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the setting key 121IW051 has been operated means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or some illegality. It is possible that means will check or change the set value. In this state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value, so in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. And it is made not to control any of setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, as one of the conditions (1), when either one of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although control is made possible, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of.

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, it shifts to the normal game processing. When it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process shifts to normal game processing. Along with the transition to normal game processing, a timer interrupt processing for game control can be executed (special symbol process processing and the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The setting value abnormal error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if the normal value (1 to 3) is stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the values stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change-in-progress flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormal error command to the CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the set value storage area does not store the correct value (1 to 3) (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). And the setting value abnormal error command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Temporarily, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (1 to 3). 0 is set as the set value, and the set value abnormal error command is transmitted.

  When receiving the set value abnormal error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the set value may be abnormal in the image display device 5 (for example, the message “the set value is abnormal” is displayed. To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting value should be changed in the image display device 5 (for example, displays a message “Please change the setting value”). The speakers 8L and 8R may notify that there is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal (for example, it may output a voice "The setting value is abnormal."), And the setting value is changed. It may be notified that it should be in a state (for example, a voice "Please change the setting value." Is output).

  After transmitting the set value abnormal error command, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). If the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), the CPU 103 confirms whether the setting key 121IW051 is ON (step S21TM3130). .

  If the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If the clear switch 121IW 050 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, the area where each total value (game information which can be displayed on display monitor 121IW029) such as reciprocity ratio, combination ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each setting value The aggregate value is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160) and performs the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Migrate to The backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands transmitted only once at the time of power on. Therefore, when transmitting the command at the time of power on, the CPU 103 can set the command transmission flag that can specify that the command at power on was transmitted and does not require backup storage at the time of power off. The command transmission flag may be cleared when the processing shifts to the normal game processing (step S21TM1470). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, it is possible to transmit the backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160).

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch 121IW 050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on). If it is judged YES in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not a legitimate value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to fix the setting value of the setting value storage area to a normal value. Therefore, the area including the setting value storage area is cleared by the RAM clear (step S21TM3150) to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode). (3) The three conditions that the clear switch 121 IW 050 is in the ON state are required. The state where the set value can be changed (step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140), when the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so the set value of the set value storage area can be determined as a normal value. You can not shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, the power is temporarily turned off, and the next time power is turned on (1) to (3) The above conditions are all satisfied, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value of the set value storage area is decided to be a normal value.

  When one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the CPU 120 for effect control. You may do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 having received this command may display on the image display device 5 a message (for example, the characters "Please turn off the power") prompting to turn off the power. . When one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 determines in advance the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. By emitting light in the power-off instruction mode, the user may be prompted to turn off the power.

  Next, processing relating to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of FIG. 16B, the CPU 103 sets a setting change in progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM 3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is held even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). If the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it checks whether the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530) . Then, if the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 121IW029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the CPU 103 specifies that control in the setting confirmation mode has been made. The command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the CPU 103 sets that the control is changed to the setting change mode. The change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM 3585), and it is confirmed whether the clear switch 121IW 050 is operated (step S21TM 3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

  If the clear switch 121IW 050 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM3520. When the clear switch 121IW 050 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and shifts to step S21TM3520.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) And the state in which the setting value can not be updated (step S21TM3600) corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value can not be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 121IW051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530) and the clear switch 121IW050 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag remains 0. Is controlled on the basis of

  Also, it is possible to execute the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540) and the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the execution of transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and the updating of the setting value (step S21TM3600). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the setting key 121IW051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530) and the clear switch 121IW050 is ON (step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 is determined as YES, and the RAM clear flag is 1). Is controlled based on the setting of

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once at the time of setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage at power off. When the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once at the time of setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage at the time of power-off. When the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM3530, when the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting change in-progress flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the flag under the setting change is cleared, it is determined that the flag under the setting change is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, and thus transition to the normal game processing is possible. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Moreover, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect to be executed when the big hit gaming state ends different according to the designated set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW 029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and power is cut off during the setting change. It is determined that the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030) and the clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040). Since this means that the clear (step S21TM3050) is not executed, it is sufficient to execute the normal processing at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (step S21TM3060) No) is confirmed In the case, it may be shifted to the normal game process.

  On the other hand, that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740) means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, temporarily setting key 121IW051 is turned off. In the setting change mode (for example, while the set value remains 0), if the set value storage area does not store the regular set value (1 to 3) before (before it is determined as YES in step S21TM3530) When an operation to change the setting value is not performed, etc.), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode to store the regular setting value (1 to 3) in the setting value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again, and executes the process of step S21TM3010 and subsequent steps.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by setting the setting key 121IW051 to the ON state and setting the clear switch 121IW050 to the ON state. As a result, it becomes possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 to clear the RAM). In addition, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting confirmation mode by setting the setting key 121IW051 to the ON state and turning the clear switch 121IW050 to the OFF state when the power is turned on, and the gaming state and the like are not initialized ( If NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, it is possible not to execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). As described above, the store clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state etc. There is.

  In the control shown in FIG. 16-2, the setting key 121IW051 is not turned off in the state of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are in the closed state, it is determined as NO in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the standby state to be in the open state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a command instructing that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the setting change mode or setting confirmation by operating the setting key 121 IW051. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the setting key 121IW051. It operates to notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended. For example, a message “Please release the gaming machine frame 3 and turn the setting key 121 IW 051 into the OFF state and end the setting change mode” may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In addition, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the processing shifts to the normal game processing, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the setting key 121IW051 A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact that the key is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the clear switch 121 IW 050 is In response to the operation (the change from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the normal game processing is performed, whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting change switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the clear switch 121 IW 050 is operated. As described above, during the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process), the execution state of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not checked during the period during which the game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being performed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the gaming control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 16C is an explanatory view of a change of the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. When the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, as shown in FIG. 16C (1), the seven-segment display of display monitor 121IW029 The letter "E" is displayed. Therefore, the store clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch 121IW 050 (performs setting change operation) while grasping that at least a regular value is not stored in the setting value storage area.

  Every time the store clerk in the game arcade operates the clear switch 121IW 050 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of 1.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.3.fwdarw.1 and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated in the order of E.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.3.fwdarw.1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is not the normal value, the information (E in this case, alphabet) is different from the numeral in the display monitor 121IW029 as the information corresponding to the value. Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly understand that the setting value storage area stores a value different from the normal value, and to prompt the setting change operation. If the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 if the setting value storage area stores a value different from the normal value (0 in this example), the manager of the game arcade is Is misunderstood that the value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 corresponds to any of the normal values, and there is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 is turned off without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, the display monitor 121IW029 displays information different from the number (E in this example). , To prevent such misunderstandings, and to ensure that the setting change operation is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, initially, the setting value storage area stores a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value. The character “E” is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 121IW029. However, if a setting change operation is performed even once thereafter and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, then Even if the setting change operation is performed any number of times, updating of the setting value is performed within the range of the normal setting value during the period controlled by the setting change mode (until the setting key 121IW051 is turned off). The setting value storage area does not store a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value, and the display monitor 121IW029 also has information (E in this example) different from the normal value. Will not be displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled to the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 is performed. Then, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the purpose of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of 3 → 1 → 2 → 3 and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 121 IW 029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, if the set value stored in the set value storage area is initially a normal value, the setting change operation may be performed any number of times thereafter. During the time when the setting change mode is controlled (until the setting key 121IW051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the normal setting value, and the setting value storage area is a normal value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (letter E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game arcade), the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 sets a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value. After that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on at the game arcade side, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played if the setting value is not changed to the proper value through the setting change mode. become unable. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the setting value can be fixed to the correct value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game arcade), the setting change flag is set in advance, and thereafter the game arcade side passes through the setting change mode. If the setting value is changed to a proper value and the setting change mode is not ended, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the setting value can be fixed to the correct value.

(Display when normal on display monitor and display when abnormal)
As shown in FIG. 16-3 (3), when the value stored in the setting value storage area is not a normal value (at the time of abnormality), four digits of the display monitor 121IW029 are used as the information corresponding thereto. In all of the display of, information different from the number (in this example, the alphabet E) is displayed. On the other hand, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value (normal time), the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 is displayed as the information corresponding thereto. The set value (2 in this example) is displayed using this.

  That is, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is abnormal, it is displayed in a more explicit manner than when it is normal, so that the notification that the setting value is abnormal can be notified more clearly. it can. The display mode when the value stored in the setting value storage area is abnormal (at the time of abnormality) and normal (at the time of normal) is not limited to this. For example, when abnormal, it is at the time of normal The display value may be displayed in a display color different from that in the above case, or the setting value may be displayed in all four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW 029 even in the normal state.

(Output period of security signal and setting change response signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of an unauthorized action, the detection of a game suspension target error, and the like are performed by the security signal. In addition, after the processing regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, the security signal is processed until the processing regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and it shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 16-1 and FIG. From step S21TM 3510, shown in 16-2, it is in the ON state during a period of time when it is determined NO in step S21TM 3060 or step S21TM 3070 and the normal game processing is executed).

  Further, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), the seventh terminal can output the setting change corresponding signal. The setting change corresponding signal is processed from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the normal game processing (for example, as shown in FIG. 16A and FIG. From step S21TM 3510, shown in 16-2, it is in the ON state during a period of time when it is determined NO in step S21TM 3060 or step S21TM 3070 and the normal game processing is executed). It is possible to externally notify that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been performed (that the process related to the change of the setting value or the confirmation has been performed) by the setting change corresponding signal. In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (when transition to the normal game processing is performed), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter the same terminal is used to Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (1), when transitioning to the setting change mode involving RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 16-1) at the time of power on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends and the processing shifts to the normal game processing. Also, with the end of the setting change mode (specifically, at a timing 50 ms after the setting change mode is ended and transition to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, 2 pulses are output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (2), although the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 16-1) was executed when the power was turned on, it did not shift to the setting change mode In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change handling signal is not turned on.

  Thus, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to recognize that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

  As shown in FIGS. 16-5 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and 50 ms have passed since the transition to the normal game processing) and the state becomes OFF. The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but as shown in FIG. 16-5 (3), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed. In this case, the setting change mode is not immediately turned off after the end of the setting change mode, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds after the setting change mode is ended. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-5 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (precisely, the setting confirmation mode ends) And the game is turned off at a timing 50 ms after shifting to the normal game processing.

  In either case of FIGS. 16-5 (3) and (4), although the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode (accurately, the setting change After the mode or setting confirmation mode ends and it shifts to the normal game processing and it becomes an OFF state at the time when 50 ms has elapsed, then (for example, after 50 ms or more has elapsed), storing the setting value of the RAM 102 Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the area is 2, 2 pulses are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode does not shift to the setting change mode, the security signal indicates It becomes ON state for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, although the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, it does not shift to the setting change mode It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be entered (in particular, the setting change mode involving the clear of the RAM is likely to be entered). If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, it may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). It can be recognized that there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been made without being able to change the setting value.

  In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it may be that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) was executed but it may not have shifted to the setting change mode. When the security device can be recognized and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, there may be a transition to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) If the management device can recognize that there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been made without being able to change the setting value, and the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds. , May have transitioned to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. As described above, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to distinguish and recognize the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, since the clear switch 121IW 050 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about +30 seconds of the period controlled in the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch 121 IW 050 is off when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), so the RAM clear (step S21TM3050). Alternatively, step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled to the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period about 50 ms controlled to the setting confirmation mode).

  As described above, since the output period of the security signal is different between when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode has been controlled or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (precisely, the setting change mode). Alternatively, when the setting confirmation mode is ended and 50 ms have elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing, the camera is turned off. Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. Also, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and that the RAM clear has been executed. If it is possible and the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting confirmation mode without clearing the RAM is controlled.

  As described above, by outputting the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from different output terminals, on the external device side where these signals are input, a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the gaming machine. Can be identified by distinguishing between the occurrence of the event and the fact that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it can be specified based on the input period of the security signal as to which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Next, based on the fact that the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode without RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). After the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set at step S21TM 3510), the setting confirmation mode is ended by setting the setting key 121 IW 051 being turned OFF in less than 50 ms, and the normal game processing is performed. Should be migrated to

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 16-5 (5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. And, less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting confirmation mode is ended (setting key 121 IW051 is turned OFF), and even when it is shifted to the normal game processing, a period of at least 50 ms or more, The setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, with regard to the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, once turned ON, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  Assuming that the period in which the setting change response signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It will be difficult to recognize the transition to the mode. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned ON at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), The external device side can recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, so that an external device such as a hall computer etc. The set values of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. Temporarily, according to the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode being less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON and then switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms, and thereafter, the set value When the number of pulses of 100 ms width corresponding to the setting value stored in the storage area is output, a period (less than 50 ms) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in the external device Can not recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the above, and recognizes only the setting change corresponding signal of the special aspect (pulse width is 100 ms) which is output after that, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mistaken. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the external device side is set by turning on the setting change corresponding signal at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example). Then, the setting value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified accurately.

(Description related to relating feature parts)
Note that the configurations shown by the characteristic portions 1560S and 121IW can be combined with the configurations shown by other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portion 31AK as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, when performing the pre-reading zone effect and the in-reach indication effect shown in the feature part 121IW, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game indication effect, the in-game indication effect, and the big hit indication effect, the pre-reading zone effect and reach Suggestion zone effect and reach during suggestion in the same manner as feature part 31AK when a predetermined period has passed from the start of suggestion effect production, change of production stage, production effect suggestion before game, suggestion effect during game production, suggestion effect during big hit A title corresponding to a presentation, a presentation by changing the presentation stage, a suggestion before a game, a suggestion during a game, a suggestion during a big hit, and a suggestion during a big hit may be configured to be able to be notified. In addition, for example, when performing a pre-reading zone effect shown in the characteristic part 121IW or an indication effect during reach, an effect by changing the effect stage, an indication before the game, an indication effect during the game, an indication effect during the big hit, the pre-reading zone effect or reach When a predetermined period of time has passed from the start of the suggestion effect during production, the effect by the change of the production stage, the suggestion effect before the game, the suggestion effect during the game, the suggestion effect during the big hit, the setting suggestion history display can be executed in the same manner as the feature 1560S You may configure it.

  Similarly, each configuration relating to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other feature portions. The features combined in this way or the individual features not combined may be combined with part or all of the configurations related to other features as appropriate. For example, with regard to the feature part 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes start output switching processing in step 71AKS013 of the production control main processing, and regarding the feature part 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the command processing at power on. With regard to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs control to be executed, for effect control that does not perform control to execute the short initial operation until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing that the setting change is finished. With regard to the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic part 74AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main processing, and regarding the characteristic part 75AK, in step 75AKS008 of command processing at power on. Configuration of the effect control CPU120 for executing a constant change in confirmation effect control process, some or all, or may be appropriately combined.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 10 ... general winning opening 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A, 22B ... start opening Switch 23 ... count switch 30 ... hitting operation handle 31A ... stick controller 31 B ... push button 32 ... movable body 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect;
The gaming machine, wherein the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect.